WO2010005828A2 - Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy - Google Patents

Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010005828A2
WO2010005828A2 PCT/US2009/049184 US2009049184W WO2010005828A2 WO 2010005828 A2 WO2010005828 A2 WO 2010005828A2 US 2009049184 W US2009049184 W US 2009049184W WO 2010005828 A2 WO2010005828 A2 WO 2010005828A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
therapy
posture state
patient
dwell time
posture
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2009/049184
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2010005828A3 (en
Inventor
Dennis M. Skelton
Jon P. Davis
Original Assignee
Medtronic, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Medtronic, Inc. filed Critical Medtronic, Inc.
Publication of WO2010005828A2 publication Critical patent/WO2010005828A2/en
Publication of WO2010005828A3 publication Critical patent/WO2010005828A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N1/00Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
    • A61N1/18Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
    • A61N1/32Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
    • A61N1/36Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
    • A61N1/362Heart stimulators
    • A61N1/365Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential
    • A61N1/36514Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential controlled by a physiological quantity other than heart potential, e.g. blood pressure
    • A61N1/36542Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential controlled by a physiological quantity other than heart potential, e.g. blood pressure controlled by body motion, e.g. acceleration
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/103Detecting, measuring or recording devices for testing the shape, pattern, colour, size or movement of the body or parts thereof, for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/11Measuring movement of the entire body or parts thereof, e.g. head or hand tremor, mobility of a limb
    • A61B5/1116Determining posture transitions
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7235Details of waveform analysis
    • A61B5/7264Classification of physiological signals or data, e.g. using neural networks, statistical classifiers, expert systems or fuzzy systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N1/00Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
    • A61N1/18Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
    • A61N1/32Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
    • A61N1/36Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
    • A61N1/3605Implantable neurostimulators for stimulating central or peripheral nerve system
    • A61N1/3606Implantable neurostimulators for stimulating central or peripheral nerve system adapted for a particular treatment
    • A61N1/36062Spinal stimulation
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N1/00Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
    • A61N1/18Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
    • A61N1/32Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
    • A61N1/36Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
    • A61N1/3605Implantable neurostimulators for stimulating central or peripheral nerve system
    • A61N1/36128Control systems
    • A61N1/36135Control systems using physiological parameters
    • A61N1/36139Control systems using physiological parameters with automatic adjustment
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N1/00Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
    • A61N1/18Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
    • A61N1/32Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
    • A61N1/36Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
    • A61N1/372Arrangements in connection with the implantation of stimulators
    • A61N1/37211Means for communicating with stimulators
    • A61N1/37235Aspects of the external programmer
    • A61N1/37247User interfaces, e.g. input or presentation means
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/02Details of sensors specially adapted for in-vivo measurements
    • A61B2562/0219Inertial sensors, e.g. accelerometers, gyroscopes, tilt switches
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/103Detecting, measuring or recording devices for testing the shape, pattern, colour, size or movement of the body or parts thereof, for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/11Measuring movement of the entire body or parts thereof, e.g. head or hand tremor, mobility of a limb
    • A61B5/1118Determining activity level
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/68Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient
    • A61B5/6846Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient specially adapted to be brought in contact with an internal body part, i.e. invasive
    • A61B5/6847Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient specially adapted to be brought in contact with an internal body part, i.e. invasive mounted on an invasive device
    • A61B5/686Permanently implanted devices, e.g. pacemakers, other stimulators, biochips
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N1/00Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
    • A61N1/18Applying electric currents by contact electrodes
    • A61N1/32Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents
    • A61N1/36Applying electric currents by contact electrodes alternating or intermittent currents for stimulation
    • A61N1/362Heart stimulators
    • A61N1/365Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential
    • A61N1/36514Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential controlled by a physiological quantity other than heart potential, e.g. blood pressure
    • A61N1/36535Heart stimulators controlled by a physiological parameter, e.g. heart potential controlled by a physiological quantity other than heart potential, e.g. blood pressure controlled by body position or posture
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H50/00ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics
    • G16H50/20ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics for computer-aided diagnosis, e.g. based on medical expert systems

Definitions

  • a variety of medical devices are used for chronic, e.g., long-term, delivery of therapy to patients suffering from a variety of conditions, such as chronic pain, tremor, Parkinson's disease, epilepsy, urinary or fecal incontinence, sexual dysfunction, obesity, or gastroparesis.
  • electrical stimulation generators are used for chronic delivery of electrical stimulation therapies such as cardiac pacing, neurostimulation, muscle stimulation, or the like.
  • Pumps or other fluid delivery devices may be used for chronic delivery of therapeutic agents, such as drugs.
  • such devices provide therapy continuously or periodically according to parameters contained within a program.
  • a program may comprise respective values for each of a plurality of parameters, specified by a clinician.
  • the patient may be allowed to activate and/or modify the therapy delivered by the medical device.
  • a patient may be provided with a patient programming device.
  • the patient programming device communicates with a medical device to allow the patient to activate therapy and/or adjust therapy parameters.
  • an implantable medical device such as an implantable neurostimulator
  • the patient programmer may communicate with the IMD via wireless telemetry to control the IMD and/or retrieve information from the IMD.
  • An implantable medical device detects a posture state of the patient and adjusts therapy according to the detected posture state.
  • a posture state may refer to a patient posture or a combination of patient posture and patient activity.
  • therapy may be adjusted.
  • the therapy may be adjusted to accommodate differences in a patient's response to therapy when the patient occupies different posture states.
  • the IMD may adjust therapy delivered to the patient.
  • a patient posture state may be transient, i.e., brief or temporary. To avoid adjusting therapy in response to transient posture states, a time delay may be imposed.
  • the time delay which may be referred to as a dwell time, may be used to prevent therapy adjustments in response to transient posture states.
  • a dwell time only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for a minimum length of time will result in therapy adjustment.
  • different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions.
  • patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed. Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state.
  • the disclosure provides a method comprising delivering therapy to a patient, detecting a posture state transition of a patient, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition, detecting a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjusting the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
  • the disclosure provides a medical device comprising a posture state module that detects a posture state transition of a patient, a therapy module that delivers therapy to a patient, and a processor that, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusts the therapy based on the posture state transition, detects a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjusts the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
  • the disclosure provides a medical system comprising a medical device that detects a posture state transition of a patient, and delivers therapy to a patient upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, an external programmer that receives a patient adjustment of the therapy, and a processor that adjusts the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
  • the disclosure provides a computer-readable medium comprising instructions to cause a processor to deliver therapy to a patient, detect a posture state transition of a patient, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition, detect a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjust the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
  • FIG. IA is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system including two implantable stimulation leads.
  • FIG. IB is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system including three implantable stimulation leads.
  • FIG. 1 C is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable drug delivery system including a delivery catheter.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example patient programmer for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
  • FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example clinician programmer for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
  • FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an implantable electrical stimulator.
  • FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an implantable drug pump.
  • FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an external programmer for an implantable medical device.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an example system that includes an external device, such as a server, and one or more computing devices that are coupled to an implantable medical device and external programmer shown in FIGS. IA- 1C via a network.
  • an external device such as a server
  • computing devices that are coupled to an implantable medical device and external programmer shown in FIGS. IA- 1C via a network.
  • FIGS. 8A-8C are conceptual illustrations of posture volumes and vectors that may be used to define a posture state of a patient based on signals sensed by a posture state sensor.
  • FIG. 9 A is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to one aspect of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 9B is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to another aspect of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 9C is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to yet another aspect of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is an example timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment prior to expiration of the dwell time.
  • FIG. 11 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded during various occurrences of the dwell time.
  • FIG. 12 is a timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment following expiration o f a dwell time .
  • FIG. 13 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded following various occurrences of the dwell time.
  • FIG. 14 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for updating a dwell time based on one or more user-initiated therapy adjustments.
  • FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer when a patient remains in one posture state.
  • FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer with one change in posture state.
  • FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer with two changes in posture states.
  • FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example search timer and posture stability timer with the last posture state change occurring outside of the posture search timer.
  • FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for associating a received therapy adjustment with a posture state to evaluate dwell time adjustment.
  • a posture state may refer to a posture or a combination of posture and activity.
  • Efficacy may refer, in general, to a combination of a degree of alleviation of symptoms, alone or in combination with a degree of undesirable side effects.
  • Changes in posture state may cause changes in efficacy due to changes in distances between electrodes or other therapy delivery elements, e.g., due to temporary migration of leads or catheters caused by forces or stresses associated with different postures, or from changes in compression of patient tissue in different posture states.
  • posture state changes may present changes in symptoms or symptom levels, e.g., pain level. For example, for a given patient, sitting may be more painful than standing, or standing may be associated with physical activity that presents more pain.
  • a medical device may use a posture state module that detects patient posture state.
  • the medical device may adjust therapy in response to different posture states detected by the posture state module.
  • Adjustment of therapy may refer to adjustment of therapy parameters or selection of different therapy programs or groups of programs defining different sets of therapy parameters.
  • Therapy adjustments in response to different posture states may be fully automatic, semi-automatic in the sense that a user may provide approval of proposed changes, or user-directed in the sense that the patient may manually adjust therapy based on a posture state detection.
  • a patient posture state may be transient, i.e., brief or temporary.
  • a time delay may be imposed.
  • the time delay which may be referred to as a dwell time, may be used to prevent therapy adjustments in response to transient posture states.
  • a dwell time only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for a minimum length of time will result in therapy adjustment.
  • the dwell time may ensure that a posture state is stable before therapy is adjusted, based on the posture state.
  • different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions.
  • a medical device may be configured to delay therapy adjustment until expiration of the dwell time, indicating a stable posture state. If the posture state changes before the dwell time expires, the medical device does not make a therapy adjustment associated with the detected posture state. If the selected posture state remains unchanged for the duration of the dwell time, indicating a stable posture state, the medical device activates the therapy adjustment associated with the posture state.
  • a dwell time may be used to prevent posture states that are only temporarily assumed from affecting therapy or initiating some other action, such as issuance of a notification, establishment of a communication session, or storing of data. Instead, only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for some required length of time will result in the initiation of some action.
  • patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed. Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state.
  • a medical device or another device such as a programmer may determine whether the manual therapy adjustments are consistent with therapy adjustments that may automatically occur in response to the posture state transition.
  • the medical device or other device may also determine whether the therapy adjustments are consistent with returning close to or toward a therapy delivered prior to the automatic therapy adjustment at the end of the dwell time.
  • the manner in which user-initiated therapy adjustments modify therapy delivery may be used to confirm that a dwell time adjustment is appropriate.
  • the medical device and/or programmer that communicates with the medical device may record and analyze therapy adjustment data.
  • Therapy adjustments are user-initiated, e.g., patient-initiated, and may be specified manually or by other media such as voice recognition or the like.
  • therapy adjustment may be entered via a programmer that communicates with the medical device, which may be an IMD.
  • a patient adjusts therapy following the detection of a posture state but before expiration of the dwell time, the patient may be seeking to more quickly transition to a particular therapy setting upon reaching the posture state. For example, that patient may not want to wait for automated therapy adjustment to be applied upon expiration of the dwell time.
  • the patient may desire rapid adjustment to ensure adequate coverage of symptoms when the patient assumes the posture state.
  • the dwell time may be too long and should be shortened.
  • the medical device may respond more quickly to the detected posture state, providing the therapy adjustment sooner, e.g., so that the patient receives appropriate therapy for more effective coverage of symptoms for the detected posture state.
  • the patient may not yet in need of the therapy adjustment for the newly detected posture state.
  • a patient may not begin to feel any adverse effect on efficacy until some period of time after a posture state has stabilized, i.e., until some time after the dwell time. Until that time, the patient may feel more comfortable with the previous therapy parameters delivered for the previous posture state.
  • the patient may desire to make a therapy adjustment associated with the newly detected posture state.
  • the medical device may apply the therapy adjustment not only after the posture state has stabilized but also at a time that the therapy adjustment will be more appropriate, given the patient's delayed response to the posture state change.
  • FIG. IA is a schematic diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system 10 including a pair of implantable electrode arrays in the form of stimulation leads 16A and 16B.
  • IMDs external and implantable medical devices
  • implantable electrical stimulators such as neurostimulators
  • the disclosure will refer to an implantable spinal cord stimulation (SCS) system for purposes of illustration, but without limitation as to other types of medical devices.
  • SCS spinal cord stimulation
  • system 10 includes an IMD 14 and external programmer 20 shown in conjunction with a patient 12.
  • IMD 14 is an implantable electrical stimulator configured for SCS, e.g., for relief of chronic pain or other symptoms.
  • FIG. IA shows an implantable medical device, other examples may include an external stimulator, e.g., with percutaneously implanted leads.
  • Stimulation energy is delivered from IMD 14 to spinal cord 18 of patient 12 via one or more electrodes of implantable leads 16A and 16B (collectively "leads 16").
  • the adjacent implantable leads 16 may have longitudinal axes that are substantially parallel to one another.
  • system 10 may alternatively be directed to any other condition that may benefit from stimulation therapy.
  • system 10 may be used to treat tremor, Parkinson's disease, epilepsy, urinary or fecal incontinence, sexual dysfunction, obesity, or gastroparesis.
  • system 10 may be configured to provide therapy taking the form of deep brain stimulation (DBS), pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, or any other stimulation therapy.
  • DBS deep brain stimulation
  • patient 12 is ordinarily a human patient.
  • Each of leads 16 may include electrodes (not shown in FIG. 1), and the parameters for a program that controls delivery of stimulation therapy by IMD 12 may include information identifying which electrodes have been selected for delivery of stimulation according to a stimulation program, the polarities of the selected electrodes, i.e., the electrode configuration for the program, and voltage or current amplitude, pulse rate, and pulse width of stimulation delivered by the electrodes. Delivery of stimulation pulses will be described for purposes of illustration. However, stimulation may be delivered in other forms such as continuous waveforms. Programs that control delivery of other therapies by IMD 12 may include other parameters, e.g., such as dosage amount, rate, or the like for drug delivery.
  • leads 16 carry one or more electrodes that are placed adjacent to the target tissue of the spinal cord.
  • One or more electrodes may be disposed at a distal tip of a lead 16 and/or at other positions at intermediate points along the lead.
  • Leads 16 may be implanted and coupled to IMD 14.
  • leads 16 may be implanted and coupled to an external stimulator, e.g., through a percutaneous port.
  • an external stimulator may be a trial or screening stimulation that is used on a temporary basis to evaluate potential efficacy to aid in consideration of chronic implantation for a patient.
  • IMD 14 may be a leadless stimulator with one or more arrays of electrodes arranged on a housing of the stimulator rather than leads that extend from the housing.
  • the stimulation may be delivered via selected combinations of electrodes carried by one or both of leads 16.
  • the target tissue may be any tissue affected by electrical stimulation energy, such as electrical stimulation pulses or waveforms. Such tissue includes nerves, smooth muscle, and skeletal muscle.
  • the target tissue is spinal cord 18. Stimulation of spinal cord 18 may, for example, prevent pain signals from traveling through the spinal cord and to the brain of patient 12. Patient 12 may perceive the interruption of pain signals as a reduction in pain and, therefore, efficacious therapy results.
  • electrodes via leads 16 are described for purposes of illustration, but arrays of electrodes may be deployed in different ways.
  • a housing associated with a leadless stimulator may carry one or more arrays of electrodes, e.g., rows and/or columns (or other patterns), to which shifting operations may be applied.
  • Such electrodes may be arranged as surface electrodes, ring electrodes, or protrusions.
  • electrode arrays may be formed by rows and/or columns of electrodes on one or more paddle leads.
  • electrode arrays may include electrode segments, which may be arranged at respective positions around a periphery of a lead, e.g., arranged in the form of one or more segmented rings around a circumference of a cylindrical lead.
  • stimulation energy is delivered by IMD 14 to the spinal cord 18 to reduce the amount of pain perceived by patient 12.
  • IMD 14 may be used with a variety of different pain therapies, such as peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS), peripheral nerve field stimulation (PNFS), DBS, cortical stimulation (CS), pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, and the like.
  • the electrical stimulation delivered by IMD 14 may take the form of electrical stimulation pulses or continuous stimulation waveforms, and may be characterized by controlled voltage levels or controlled current levels, as well as pulse width and pulse rate in the case of stimulation pulses.
  • IMD 14 delivers stimulation therapy according to one or more programs.
  • a program defines one or more parameters that define an aspect of the therapy delivered by IMD 14 according to that program.
  • a program that controls delivery of stimulation by IMD 14 in the form of pulses may define a voltage or current pulse amplitude, a pulse width, a pulse rate, for stimulation pulses delivered by IMD 14 according to that program.
  • therapy may be delivered according to multiple programs, wherein multiple programs are contained within each of a plurality of groups.
  • Each program group may support an alternative therapy selectable by patient 12, and IMD 14 may deliver therapy according to the multiple programs.
  • IMD 14 may rotate through the multiple programs of the group when delivering stimulation such that numerous conditions of patient 12 are treated.
  • stimulation pulses formulated according to parameters defined by different programs may be delivered on a time -interleaved basis.
  • a group may include a program directed to leg pain, a program directed to lower back pain, and a program directed to abdomen pain. In this manner, IMD 14 may treat different symptoms substantially simultaneously.
  • leads 16 may migrate toward IMD 14 when patient 12 bends over, resulting in displacement of electrodes and possible disruption in delivery of effective therapy.
  • stimulation energy transferred to target tissue may be reduced due to electrode migration, causing reduced efficacy in terms of relief of symptoms such as pain.
  • leads 16 may be compressed towards spinal cord 18 when patient 12 lies down. Such compression may cause an increase in the amount of stimulation energy transferred to target tissue.
  • the amplitude of stimulation therapy may need to be decreased to avoid causing patient 12 additional pain or unusual sensations, which may be considered undesirable side effects that undermine overall efficacy.
  • IMD 14 may include or be associated with a posture state module that detects the posture state of patient 12 and causes the IMD 14 to automatically adjust stimulation according to the detected posture state.
  • a posture state module may include a posture state sensor such as an accelerometer that detects when patient 12 lies down, stands up, or otherwise changes posture. In response to a posture state indication by the posture state module, IMD 14 may make a therapy adjustment.
  • IMD 14 may change program group, program, stimulation amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, and/or one or more other parameters, groups or programs to maintain therapeutic efficacy.
  • IMD 14 may automatically reduce stimulation amplitude so that patient 12 does not need to reduce stimulation amplitude manually.
  • IMD 14 may communicate with external programmer 20 to present a proposed change in stimulation in response to a posture state change, and receive approval or rejection of the change from a user, such as patient 12 or a clinician, before automatically applying the therapy change. Additionally, in response to a posture state change, IMD 14 may communicate with external programmer 20 to provide a notification to a user, such a clinician, that patient 12 has potentially experienced a fall.
  • a user may interact with a user interface of external programmer 20 to program IMD 14.
  • Programming of IMD 14 may refer generally to the generation and transfer of commands, programs, or other information to control the operation of IMD 14.
  • external programmer 20 may transmit programs, parameter adjustments, program selections, group selections, or other information to control the operation of IMD 14, e.g., by wireless telemetry.
  • external programmer 20 may transmit parameter adjustments to support therapy changes due to posture changes by patient 12.
  • a user may select programs or program groups.
  • a program may be characterized by an electrode combination, electrode polarities, voltage or current amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, and/or duration.
  • a group may be characterized by multiple programs that are delivered simultaneously or on an interleaved or rotating basis.
  • a user interface of external programmer 20 may indicate to the user the posture state in which patient 12 currently resides.
  • This patient posture state may be a static posture that does not take into account activity level, an activity level that does not take into account posture, or some combination of the posture and activity level that describes the physical position and movement of patient 12.
  • posture may be characterized as one of the following postures: standing, sitting, lying down on back, lying down on front, lying down on left side, lying down on right side.
  • Activity level may be characterized as one of high, medium and low, or be characterized in terms of a numeric scale, e.g., 1-10 or 1-12. In other examples, other gradations, e.g., high, medium high, medium, medium low, and low, or other numerical scales may be used to characterize activity level.
  • a posture state may indicate a combination of one of the above postures with one of the above activity levels. For some postures, such as lying down postures, the posture state may not need to consider activity level, as the patient may be less likely to undertake any significant activity in such postures. In other cases, all posture states may take into account posture and activity level, even if there is minimal activity in a particular posture. Posture state may be determined based on posture information and/or activity level information generated by a posture state module, which may include one or more accelerometers or other posture or activity level sensors.
  • a patient posture state may be represented by a posture state indication presented by the user interface of programmer 20 as a visible, audible, or tactile indication.
  • the posture state indication may be, for example, a graphical representation, a symbolic icon, a textual representation, such as word or number, an arrow, or any other type of indication.
  • the visible indication may be presented via a display, such as an a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or the like.
  • the visible indication may be provided in a translucent area that is selectively backlit to indicate a posture.
  • An audible indication may be produced by programmer 20 as spoken words stating a posture state, or different audible tones, different numbers of tones, or other audible information generated by the programmer to indicate posture state.
  • a tactile indication of posture state may be produced by programmer 20, for example, in the form of different numbers of vibratory pulses delivered in sequence or vibratory pulses of different lengths, amplitudes, or frequencies.
  • Programmer 20 may present multiple indications representative of different patient posture states.
  • IMD 14 may communicate a patient posture state according to a posture state parameter value sensed by a posture state module to external programmer 20, e.g., by wireless telemetry.
  • IMD 14 may transmit a posture state indication to programmer 20 on a periodic, intermittent or continuous basis or in response to a posture state change.
  • programmer 20 may request a posture state indication from IMD 14 on a periodic, intermittent or continuous basis.
  • External programmer 20 then may select and present the associated posture state indication.
  • external programmer 20 may be characterized as a physician or clinician programmer if it is primarily intended for use by a physician or clinician.
  • external programmer 20 may be characterized as a patient programmer if it is primarily intended for use by a patient.
  • a patient programmer is generally accessible to patient 12 and, in many cases, may be a portable device that may accompany patient 12 throughout the patient's daily routine.
  • IMD 14 may be constructed with a biocompatible housing, such as titanium or stainless steel, or a polymeric material such as silicone or polyurethane, and surgically implanted at a site in patient 18 near the pelvis. IMD 14 may also be implanted in patient 12 at a location minimally noticeable to patient 12. Alternatively, IMD 14 may be external with percutaneously implanted leads. For SCS, IMD 14 may be located in the lower abdomen, lower back, upper buttocks, or other location to secure IMD 14. Leads 16 may be tunneled from IMD 14 through tissue to reach the target tissue adjacent to spinal cord 18 for stimulation delivery.
  • Electrodes At the distal tips of leads 16 are one or more electrodes (not shown) that transfer the electrical stimulation from the lead to the tissue.
  • the electrodes may be electrode pads on a paddle lead, circular (e.g., ring) electrodes surrounding the body of leads 16, conformable electrodes, cuff electrodes, segmented electrodes, or any other type of electrodes capable of forming unipolar, bipolar or multipolar electrode configurations for therapy.
  • ring electrodes arranged at different axial positions at the distal ends of leads 16 will be described for purposes of illustration.
  • FIG. IB is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system
  • System 22 including three implantable stimulation leads 16A, 16B, 16C (collectively leads 16).
  • System 22 generally conforms to system 10 of FIG. IA, but includes a third lead.
  • IMD 14 may deliver stimulation via combinations of electrodes carried by all three leads 16, or a subset of the three leads.
  • the third lead, e.g., lead 16C may include a greater number of electrodes than leads 16A and 16B and be positioned between leads 16A and 16B or on one side of either lead 16A or 16B.
  • External programmer 20 may be initially told the number and configuration of leads 16 in order to appropriately program stimulation therapy.
  • leads 16A and 16B could include four electrodes, while lead 16C includes eight or sixteen electrodes, thereby forming a so-called 4-8-4 or 4-16-4 lead configuration.
  • Other lead configurations such as 8-16-8, 8-4-8, 16-8-16, 16-4-16, are possible.
  • electrodes on lead 16C may be smaller in size and/or closer together than the electrodes of leads 16A or 16B. Movement of lead 16C due to changing activities or postures of patient 12 may, in some instances, more severely affect stimulation efficacy than movement of leads 16A or 16B. Patient 12 may further benefit from the ability of IMD 14 to detect posture states and associated changes and automatically adjust stimulation therapy to maintain therapy efficacy in a three lead system 22.
  • FIG. 1 C is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable drug delivery system 24 including one delivery catheter 28 coupled to IMD 26.
  • drug delivery system 24 is substantially similar to systems 10 and 22.
  • drug delivery system 24 performs the similar therapy functions via delivery of drug stimulation therapy instead of electrical stimulation therapy.
  • IMD 26 functions as a drug pump in the example of FIG. 1C, and IMD 26 communicates with external programmer 20 to initialize therapy or modify therapy during operation.
  • IMD 26 may be refillable to allow chronic drug delivery.
  • IMD 26 is shown as coupled to only one catheter 28 positioned along spinal cord 18, additional catheters may also be coupled to IMD 26. Multiple catheters may deliver drugs or other therapeutic agents to the same anatomical location or the same tissue or organ. Alternatively, each catheter may deliver therapy to different tissues within patient 12 for the purpose of treating multiple symptoms or conditions.
  • IMD 26 may be an external device which includes a percutaneous catheter that forms catheter 28 or that is coupled to catheter 28, e.g., via a fluid coupler. In other examples, IMD 26 may include both electrical stimulation as described in IMD 14 and drug delivery therapy.
  • IMD 26 may also operate using parameters that define the method of drug delivery.
  • IMD 26 may include programs, or groups of programs, that define different delivery methods for patient 14.
  • a program that controls delivery of a drug or other therapeutic agent may include a titration rate or information controlling the timing of bolus deliveries.
  • Patient 14 may use external programmer 20 to adjust the programs or groups of programs to regulate the therapy delivery.
  • IMD 26 may include a posture state module that monitors the posture state of patient 12 and adjusts therapy accordingly.
  • the posture state module may indicate that patient 12 transitions from lying down to standing up.
  • IMD 26 may automatically increase the rate of drug delivered to patient 12 in the standing position if patient 12 has indicated that pain increased when standing. This automated adjustment to therapy based upon posture state may be activated for all or only a portion of the programs used by IMD 26 to deliver therapy.
  • FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example patient programmer 30 for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
  • a patient may use programmer 30 to enter therapy adjustments.
  • a patient may select programs, select program groups, and/or adjust program parameters such as amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, electrode combination or electrode polarity.
  • Patient programmer 30 is an example of external programmer 20 illustrated in FIGS. IA, IB and 1C and may be used with either IMD 14 or IMD 26. In alternative examples, patient programmer 30 may be used with an external medical device.
  • patient programmer 30 provides a user interface (not shown) for a user, such as patient 12, to manage and program stimulation therapy.
  • Patient programmer 30 is protected by housing 32, which encloses circuitry necessary for patient programmer 30 to operate.
  • Patient programmer 30 also includes display 36, power button 38, increase button 52, decrease button 50, sync button 58, stimulation ON button 54, and stimulation OFF button 56.
  • Cover 34 protects display 36 from being damaged during patient programmer 30 use.
  • Patient programmer 30 also includes control pad 40 which allows a user to navigate through items displayed on display 36 in the direction of arrows 42, 44, 46, and 48.
  • the buttons and pad 40 may take the form of soft keys (e.g., with functions and contexts indicated on display 36), with functionality that may change, for example, based on current programming operation or user preference.
  • display 36 may be a touch screen in which patient 12 may interact directly with display 36 without the use of control pad 40 or even increase button 52 and decrease button 50.
  • patient 12 may be enter manual therapy adjustments. If posture-response therapy is enabled to automatically adjust therapy based on detected posture state, patient 12 may also have the ability to manually adjust therapy, either completely or to a limited degree. For example, when IMD 14 or 26 adjusts stimulation therapy based on detected posture state, patient 12 also may adjust the therapy, e.g., by adjusting voltage or current amplitude, pulse width or pulse rate, or by selecting different programs or program groups. Patient therapy adjustments may be entered before, after or during the running of dwell time following a posture state detection.
  • patient programmer 30 is a hand held device.
  • Patient programmer 30 may accompany patient 12 throughout a daily routine.
  • patient programmer 30 may be used by a clinician when patient 12 visits the clinician in a hospital or clinic.
  • patient programmer 30 may be a clinician programmer that remains with the clinician or in the clinic and is used by the clinician and/or patient 12 when patient 12 is in the clinic.
  • small size and portability may be less important. Accordingly, a clinician programmer may be sized larger than a patient programmer, and it may provide a larger screen for more full-featured programming.
  • Housing 32 may be constructed of a polymer, metal alloy, composite, or combination material suitable to protect and contain components of patient programmer 30. In addition, housing 32 may be partially or completely sealed such that fluids, gases, or other elements may not penetrate the housing and affect components therein.
  • Power button 38 may turn patient programmer 30 ON or OFF as desired by patient 12.
  • Patient 12 may control the illumination level, or backlight level, of display 36 by using control pad 40 to navigate through the user interface and increase or decrease the illumination level with decrease and increase buttons 50 and 52.
  • illumination may be controlled by a knob that rotates clockwise and counter-clockwise to control patient programmer 30 operational status and display 36 illumination.
  • Patient programmer 30 may be prevented from turning OFF during telemetry with IMD 14 or another device to prevent the loss of transmitted data or the stalling of normal operation.
  • patient programmer 30 and IMD 14 may include instructions that handle possible unplanned telemetry interruption, such as battery failure or inadvertent device shutdown.
  • Display 36 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or similar monochrome or color display capable of providing visible information to patient 12.
  • Display 36 may provide a user interface regarding current stimulation therapy, posture state information, provide a user interface for receiving feedback or medication input from patient 12, display an active group of stimulation programs, and display operational status of patient programmer 30 or IMD 14 or 26.
  • patient programmer 30 may provide a scrollable list of groups, and a scrollable list of programs within each group, via display 36.
  • Control pad 40 allows patient 12 to navigate through items displayed on display 36.
  • Patient 12 may press control pad 40 on any of arrows 42, 44, 46, and 48 in order to move to another item on display 36 or move to another screen not currently shown on the display.
  • pressing the middle of control pad 40 may select any item highlighted in display 36.
  • scroll bars, a scroll wheel, individual buttons, or a joystick may perform the complete or partial functions of control pad 40.
  • control pad 40 may be a touch pad that allows patient 12 to move a cursor within the user interface displayed on display 36 to manage therapy.
  • Decrease button 50 and increase button 52 provide an input mechanism for patient 12.
  • decrease button 50 may decrease the value of a highlighted stimulation parameter, e.g., amplitude, pulse width or pulse rate, every time the decrease button is pressed.
  • increase button 52 may increase the value of a highlighted stimulation parameter one step every time the increase button is pressed. While buttons 50 and 52 may be used to control the value of any stimulation parameter, buttons 50 and 52 may also control patient feedback input. When either of buttons 50 and 52 is selected, patient programmer 30 may initialize communication with IMD 14 or 26 to change therapy accordingly.
  • stimulation ON button 54 directs programmer 30 to generate a command for communication to IMD 14 that turns on stimulation therapy.
  • Stimulation OFF button 56 turns off stimulation therapy when depressed by patient 12.
  • Sync button 58 forces patient programmer 30 to communicate with IMD 14.
  • pressing sync button 58 turns on the automatic posture response to allow IMD 14 to automatically change therapy according to the posture state of patient 12. Pressing sync button 58 again, when the automatic posture response screen is displayed, turns off the automatic posture response.
  • patient 12 may use control pad 40 to adjust the volume, contrast, illumination, time, and measurement units of patient programmer 30.
  • buttons 54 and 56 may be configured to perform operational functions related to stimulation therapy or the use of patient programmer 30.
  • buttons 54 and 56 may control the volume of audible sounds produced by programmer 20, wherein button 54 increases the volume and button 56 decreases the volume.
  • Button 58 may be pressed to enter an operational menu that allows patient 12 to configure the user interface of patient programmer 30 to the desires of patient 12.
  • patient 12 may be able to select a language, backlight delay time, display 36 brightness and contrast, or other similar options.
  • buttons 50 and 52 may control all operational and selection functions, such as those related to audio volume or stimulation therapy.
  • Patient programmer 30 may take other shapes or sizes not described herein.
  • patient programmer 30 may take the form of a clam-shell shape, similar to some cellular phone designs. When patient programmer 30 is closed, some or all elements of the user interface may be protected within the programmer. When patient programmer 30 is opened, one side of the programmer may contain a display while the other side may contain input mechanisms. In any shape, patient programmer 30 may be capable of performing the requirements described in this disclosure. Alternative examples of patient programmer 30 may include other input mechanisms such as a keypad, microphone, camera lens, or any other media input that allows the user to interact with the user interface provided by patient programmer 30.
  • buttons of patient programmer 30 may perform different functions than the functions provided in FIG. 2 as an example.
  • other examples of patient programmer 30 may include different button layouts or different numbers of buttons.
  • patient programmer 30 may even include a single touch screen that incorporates all user interface functionality with a limited set of buttons or no other buttons.
  • FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example clinician programmer 60 for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
  • Clinician programmer 60 is an example of external programmer 20 illustrated in FIGS. IA, IB and 1C and may be used with either IMD 14 or IMD 26. In alternative examples, clinician programmer 60 may be used with an external medical device. Using programmer 60, a user may make any of a variety of therapy adjustments. As shown in FIG. 3, clinician programmer 60 provides a user interface (not shown) for a user, such as a clinician, physician, technician, or nurse, to manage and program stimulation therapy. Clinician programmer 60 is protected by housing 62, which encloses circuitry necessary for clinician programmer 60 to operate.
  • Clinician programmer 60 includes display 64 and power button 66.
  • display 64 is a touch screen that accepts user input via touching certain areas within display 64.
  • the user may use stylus 68 to touch display 64 and select virtual buttons, sliders, keypads, dials, or other such representations presented by the user interface shown by display 64.
  • the user may be able to touch display 64 with a finger, pen, or any other pointing device.
  • clinician programmer 60 may include one or more buttons, keypads, control pads, touch pads, or other devices that accept user input, similar to patient programmer 30.
  • clinician programmer 60 is a hand held device.
  • Clinician programmer 60 may be used within the clinic or on in-house patient calls. Clinician programmer 60 may be used to communicate with multiple IMDs 14 and 26 within different patients. In this manner, clinician programmer 60 may be capable of communicating with many different devices and retain patient data separate for other patient data. In some examples, clinician programmer 60 may be a larger device that may be less portable, such as a notebook computer, workstation, or even a remote computer that communicates with IMD 14 or 26 via a remote telemetry device.
  • clinician programmer 60 may be completed via the touch screen of display 64.
  • the user may program stimulation therapy, modify programs or groups, retrieve stored therapy data, retrieve posture state information, define posture states and other activity information, change the contrast and backlighting of display 64, or any other therapy related function.
  • clinician programmer 60 may be capable of communicating with a networked server in order to send or receive an email or other message, retrieve programming instructions, access a help guide, send an error message, or perform any other function that may be beneficial to prompt therapy.
  • Housing 62 may be constructed of a polymer, metal alloy, composite, or combination material suitable to protect and contain components of clinician programmer 60.
  • housing 62 may be partially or completely sealed such that fluids, gases, or other elements may not penetrate the housing and affect components therein.
  • Power button 66 may turn clinician programmer 60 ON or OFF as desired by the user.
  • Clinician programmer 60 may require a password, biometric input, or other security measure to be entered and accepted before the user can use clinician programmer 60.
  • Clinician programmer 60 may take other shapes or sizes not described herein.
  • clinician programmer 60 may take the form of a clam-shell shape, similar to some cellular phone designs.
  • clinician programmer 60 When clinician programmer 60 is closed, at least a portion of display 64 is protected within housing 62.
  • clinician programmer 60 is opened, one side of the programmer may contain a display while the other side may contain input mechanisms.
  • clinician programmer 60 may be capable of performing the requirements described herein.
  • FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an IMD 14.
  • IMD 14 includes a processor 80, memory 82, stimulation generator 84, posture state module 86, telemetry module 88, dwell time module 89, and power source 90.
  • Memory 82 may store instructions for execution by processor 80, stimulation therapy data, posture state information, posture state indications, and any other information regarding therapy or patient 12. Therapy information may be recorded for long-term storage and retrieval by a user, and the therapy information may include any data created by or stored in IMD 14.
  • Memory 82 may include separate memories for storing instructions, posture state information, program histories, and any other data that may benefit from separate physical memory modules.
  • IMD 14 may send raw posture state data or posture state detections to an external programmer, such as programmer 30 or 60, and the programmer may apply a dwell time and then send instructions to IMD 14 to adjust therapy.
  • posture state detection and dwell time analysis are performed within IMD 14, which adjusts therapy according to therapy associated with a particular posture state after that posture state is detected and the dwell time has expired.
  • therapy adjustment may include adjustment of one or more therapy parameters such as amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, or electrode combination or polarity, or selection of different programs or program groups.
  • IMD 14 may be configured to analyze manual therapy adjustments with respect to the dwell time, and automatically adjust dwell time length based on the analysis. Alternatively, IMD 14 may send manual therapy adjustment and timing information to an external programmer 30 or 60 for analysis and adjustment of the dwell time used by IMD 14.
  • Processor 80 controls stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation via electrode combinations formed by electrodes in one or more electrode arrays.
  • stimulation generator 84 may deliver electrical stimulation therapy via electrodes on one or more leads 16, e.g., as stimulation pulses or continuous waveforms.
  • Components described as processors within IMD 14, external programmer 20 or any other device described in this disclosure may each comprise one or more processors, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic circuitry, or the like, either alone or in any suitable combination.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • Stimulation generator 84 may include stimulation generation circuitry to generate stimulation pulses or waveforms and switching circuitry to switch the stimulation across different electrode combinations, e.g., in response to control by processor 80.
  • processor 80 may control the switching circuitry on a selective basis to cause stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation to selected electrode combinations and to shift the electrical stimulation to different electrode combinations in a first direction or a second direction when the therapy must be delivered to a different location within patient 12.
  • stimulation generator 84 may include multiple current or voltage sources to drive more than one electrode combination at one time. In this case, stimulation generator 84 may decrease a stimulation amplitude (e.g., a current or voltage amplitude) to the first electrode combination and simultaneously increase a stimulation amplitude to the second electrode combination to shift the stimulation therapy.
  • a stimulation amplitude e.g., a current or voltage amplitude
  • An electrode combination may be represented by a data stored in a memory location, e.g., in memory 82, of IMD 14.
  • Processor 80 may access the memory location to determine the electrode combination and control stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation via the indicated electrode combination.
  • processor 80 may direct stimulation generator 84 to make the appropriate changes to therapy according to instructions within memory 82 and rewrite the memory location to indicate the changed therapy. In other examples, rather than rewriting a single memory location, processor
  • 80 may make use of two or more memory locations.
  • processor 80 may access not only the memory location specifying the electrode combination but also other memory locations specifying various stimulation parameters such as voltage or current amplitude, pulse width and pulse rate.
  • Stimulation generator 84 e.g., under control of processor 80, then makes use of the electrode combination and parameters in formulating and delivering the electrical stimulation to patient 12.
  • Processor 80 also may control telemetry module
  • telemetry module 88 may send information to and receive information from patient programmer 30.
  • An example range of electrical stimulation parameters likely to be effective in treating chronic pain, e.g., when applied to spinal cord 18, are listed below.
  • stimulation signals may be of any of a variety of forms such as sine waves or the like.
  • Pulse Rate between approximately 0.5 Hz and 1200 Hz, more preferably between approximately 5 Hz and 250 Hz, and still more preferably between approximately 30 Hz and 130 Hz.
  • Amplitude between approximately 0.1 volts and 50 volts, more preferably between approximately 0.5 volts and 20 volts, and still more preferably between approximately 1 volt and 10 volts.
  • a current amplitude may be defined as the biological load in the voltage that is delivered.
  • the range of current amplitude may be between 0.1 milliamps (mA) and 50 niA.
  • Pulse Width between about 10 microseconds and 5000 microseconds, more preferably between approximately 100 microseconds and 1000 microseconds, and still more preferably between approximately 180 microseconds and 450 microseconds.
  • DBS deep brain stimulation
  • alleviation or reduction of symptoms associated with Parkinson's disease, essential tremor, epilepsy or other disorders may make use of stimulation having a pulse rate in the range of approximately .5 to 1200 Hz, more preferably 5 to 250 Hz, and still more preferably 30 to 185 Hz, and a pulse width in the range of approximately 10 microseconds and 5000 microseconds, more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 1000 microseconds, still more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 450 microseconds, and even more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 150 microseconds.
  • Amplitude ranges such as those described above with reference to SCS, or other amplitude ranges, may be used for different DBS applications.
  • Processor 80 stores stimulation parameters in memory 82, e.g., as programs and groups of programs. Upon selection of a particular program group, processor 80 may control stimulation generator 84 to deliver stimulation according to the programs in the groups, e.g., simultaneously or on a time-interleaved basis.
  • a group may include a single program or multiple programs. As mentioned previously, each program may specify a set of stimulation parameters, such as amplitude, pulse width and pulse rate.
  • each program may specify a particular electrode combination for delivery of stimulation.
  • the electrode combination may specify particular electrodes in a single array or multiple arrays, e.g., on a single lead or among multiple leads.
  • Posture state module 86 allows IMD 14 to sense the posture state of patient 12, e.g., posture, activity or any other static position or motion of patient 12.
  • posture state module 86 may include one or more accelerometers, such as three-axis accelerometers, capable of detecting static orientation or vectors in three- dimensions.
  • posture state module 86 may include one or more micro- electro-mechanical accelerometers.
  • posture state module 86 may alternatively or additionally include one or more gyroscopes, pressure transducers or other sensors to sense the posture state of patient 12.
  • Posture state information generated by posture state module 86 and processor 80 may correspond to an activity and/or posture undertaken by patient 12 or a gross level of physical activity, e.g., activity counts based on footfalls or the like.
  • processor 80 processes the analog output of the posture state sensor in posture state module 86 to determine activity and/or posture data.
  • processor 80 or a processor of posture state module 86 may process the raw signals provided by the posture state sensor to determine activity counts.
  • processor 80 may process the signals provided by the posture state sensor to determine velocity of motion information along each axis.
  • each of the x, y, and z signals provided by the posture state sensor has both a DC component and an AC component.
  • the DC components may describe the gravitational force exerted upon the sensor and may thereby be used to determine orientation of the sensor within the gravitational field of the earth. Assuming the orientation of the sensor is relatively fixed with respect to patient 12, the DC components of the x, y and z signals may be utilized to determine the patient's orientation within the gravitational field, and hence to determine the posture of patient 12.
  • the AC component of the x, y and z signals may yield information about patient motion.
  • the AC component of a signal may be used to derive a value for an activity describing the patient's motion. This activity may involve a level, direction of motion, or acceleration of patient 12.
  • One method for determining the activity is an activity count.
  • An activity count may be used to indicate the activity or activity level of patient 12.
  • a signal processor may sum the magnitudes of the AC portion of an accelerometer signal for "N" consecutive samples. For instance, assuming sampling occurs as 25 Hz, "N" may be set to 25, so that count logic provides the sum of the samples that are obtained in one second. This sum may be referred to as an "activity count.”
  • the number "N" of consecutive samples may be selected by processor 80 or a processor of posture state module 86 based on the current posture state, if desired.
  • the activity count may be the activity portion of the posture state parameter value that may be added to the posture portion.
  • the resulting posture state parameter value may then incorporate both activity and posture to generate an accurate indication of the motion of patient 12.
  • the activity portion of the posture state parameter value may describe a direction of motion.
  • This activity parameter may be associated with a vector and an associated tolerance, which may be a distance from the vector.
  • Another example of an activity parameter relates to acceleration.
  • a value quantifying a level of change of motion over time in a particular direction may be associated with the activity portion of a posture state parameter value.
  • Posture state information from posture state module 86 may be stored in memory 82 for later review by a clinician, used to adjust therapy, present a posture state indication to patient 12, or some combination thereof.
  • processor 80 may record the posture state parameter value, or output, of the 3 -axis accelerometer and assign the posture state parameter value to a certain predefined posture indicated by the posture state parameter value. In this manner, IMD 14 may be able to track how often patient 12 remains within a certain posture.
  • IMD 14 may also store which group or program was being used to deliver therapy when patient 12 was in the sensed posture. Further, processor 80 may also adjust therapy for a new posture when posture state module 86 indicates that patient 12 has in fact changed postures. Therefore, IMD 14 may be configured to provide posture responsive stimulation therapy to patient 12. Stimulation adjustments in response to posture state may be automatic or semi-automatic (subject to patient approval). In many cases, fully automatic adjustments may be desirable so that IMD 14 may react more quickly to posture state changes.
  • a posture state parameter value from posture state module 86 that indicates the posture state may constantly vary throughout the day of patient 12. However, a certain activity (e.g., walking, running, or biking) or a posture (e.g., standing, sitting, or lying down) may include multiple posture state parameter values from posture state module 86.
  • Memory 82 may include definitions for each posture state of patient 12. In one example, the definitions of each posture state may be illustrated as a cone in three- dimensional space.
  • posture state parameter value e.g., a vector
  • processor 80 indicates that patient 12 is in the posture state corresponding to the posture volume or the reference posture vector.
  • a cone is described for purposes of example.
  • Other definitions of posture states may be illustrated as other shapes, e.g., donuts or toroids, in three-dimensional space.
  • posture state parameter value from the 3- axis accelerometer may be compared to a look-up table value or equation to determine the posture state in which patient 12 currently resides.
  • Posture responsive stimulation may allow IMD 14 to implement a certain level of automation in therapy adjustments.
  • Automatically adjusting stimulation may free patient 12 from the constant task of manually adjusting therapy each time patient 12 changes posture or starts and stops a certain posture state.
  • Such manual adjustment of stimulation parameters can be tedious, requiring patient 12 to, for example, depress one or more keys of patient programmer 30 multiple times during the patient posture state to maintain adequate symptom control.
  • patient 12 may eventually be able to enjoy posture state responsive stimulation therapy without the need to continue making changes for different postures via patient programmer 30. Instead, patient 12 may transition immediately or over time to fully automatic adjustments based on posture state.
  • posture state module 86 may contain multiple single-axis accelerometers, dual-axis accelerometers, 3-axis accelerometers, or some combination thereof.
  • an accelerometer or other sensor may be located within or on IMD 14, on one of leads 16 (e.g., at the distal tip or at an intermediate position), an additional sensor lead positioned somewhere within patient 12, within an independent implantable sensor, or even worn on patient 12.
  • one or more microsensors may be implanted within patient 12 to communicate posture state information wirelessly to IMD 14. In this manner, the posture state of patient 12 may be determined from multiple posture state sensors placed at various locations on or within the body of patient 12.
  • posture state module 86 may additionally or alternatively be configured to sense one or more physiological parameters of patient 12.
  • physiological parameters may include heart rate, electromyography (EMG), an electroencephalogram (EEG), an electrocardiogram (ECG), temperature, respiration rate, or pH.
  • EMG electromyography
  • EEG electroencephalogram
  • ECG electrocardiogram
  • Dwell time module 89 may be used to ensure that once posture state module 86 classifies patient 12 in a posture state, patient 12 does not exit that posture state for a predetermined dwell time, e.g., a delay time imposed between the time posture state module 86 detects a new posture state of patient 12 and the time processor 80 controls stimulation generator 84 to initiate a therapy adjustment in response to this detected posture state. If patient 12 does exit the posture state before the dwell time elapses, no actions are taken in response to classification of patient 12 in this posture state. In one example, only after this dwell time has elapsed will any actions such as therapy adjustments or notifications be taken in response to the classification. In this manner, dwell times are utilized to ensure that transitory posture states that patient 12 may occupy for only a short period of time will not prompt actions such as an unwanted change in therapy.
  • a predetermined dwell time e.g., a delay time imposed between the time posture state module 86 detects a new posture state of patient 12 and the time processor 80 controls stimulation generator 84 to initiate
  • dwell times prevents a patient who is occupying a posture state that is at a boundary between two posture state definitions from triggering multiple actions (e.g., multiple therapy modifications) as patient 12 transitions between the two posture states over a short period of time.
  • multiple actions e.g., multiple therapy modifications
  • An action in response to such short-term and repeated posture state re-classifications will be suppressed.
  • An action e.g., therapy change
  • This use of a dwell time introduces stability into the system, such that temporarily assumed, transient posture states do not result in the initiation of therapy changes or other posture state -responsive actions.
  • dwell time module 89 accesses current posture state information from posture state module 86.
  • Dwell time module 89 may also store an indication of the posture state that patient 12 was most-recently classified in a stable manner, e.g., the posture state that most-recently fulfilled the dwell time requirement.
  • Dwell time module 89 compares this most recent stable posture state to the posture state detected by posture state module 86. If a mismatch occurs, indicating a change in posture state, a potential re-classification of the patient's posture state may be underway.
  • a corresponding dwell time T is measured, as by a timer provided by dwell time module 89.
  • posture state detected by posture state module 86 must remain stable throughout this dwell time T such that no other posture state re-classification by posture state module 86 occurs. If this stability is maintained, dwell time module 89 provides an indication to processor 80 that posture state reclassification occurred, and the processor proceeds to initiate the appropriate one or more responses for the detected posture state, such as adjustment of therapy voltage or current amplitude to an amplitude appropriate for the posture state.
  • the appropriate responses may involve modification, cessation, or initiation of therapy delivery, storing of data, notification generation, an initiation or change in a communication session, and/or other responses involving system 10 or 22 (FIGS. IA and IB, respectively).
  • the dwell time is reset when posture state module 86 detects the change in posture state. The process may then be repeated if the newly detected posture state is different from the most-recently classified stable posture state.
  • the dwell time that is used by dwell time module 89 may be programmable. This value may be programmed by a clinician, for instance, when IMD 14 is being initialized, and may be re-programmed any time thereafter as desired by the clinician. In addition, different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions. In one example, a dwell time may be automatically selected by processor 80 based on current system conditions. For example, the dwell time may be based, in full or in part, on the most-recently classified stable posture state. As another example, a newly- detected posture state may be used to select the dwell time. As a further example, the dwell time may be selected based on the transition from the patient's most-recent stable posture state to the newly-detected posture state.
  • different dwell times may be selected based on stable posture state, newly detected posture state, or a combination of the stable posture state and the detected posture state, e.g., based on the particular posture state transition running from the stable posture state to the detected posture state. If there are N different posture state transitions possible among M different posture states, then there may be N different dwell times used by dwell time module 89. In some examples, some posture state transitions may have the same dwell times while other posture state transitions may have different dwell times.
  • dwell time module 89 may apply different dwell times for transitions from upright and active to upright and inactive, upright and inactive to upright and active, upright and active to lying front, upright and inactive to lying back, upright and active to lying back, upright and inactive to lying back, lying back to lying front, lying right to lying left, lying left to lying back, and so forth.
  • a different dwell time may be selected based on the stable posture state and the newly detected posture state.
  • dwell time module 89 uses the dwell time for that transition. If the lying back posture state remains stable for the prescribed dwell time, then processor 80 may control stimulation generator 84 to adjust therapy from the therapy delivered for the upright posture state to the therapy delivered for the lying back posture state.
  • the particular therapy adjustments may be programmed into memory 82, e.g., based on automated programming of therapy parameters and/or clinician-directed programming of therapy parameters for particular posture states.
  • the dwell times may be stored in memory 82, e.g., in a lookup table, or other data structure.
  • the dwell time that is imposed by dwell time module 89 may be response-specific. In particular, different dwell times may be used for different actions taken by IMD 14. For example, once a re-classification of posture state occurs, a first dwell time may be imposed before processor 80 initiates a first response (e.g., an adjustment in therapy delivery). A second dwell time that is different from the first dwell time may be imposed before processor 80 initiates a second response (e.g., an event notification) and so on. If multiple dwell times are used, it is possible for the posture state classification to remain stable long enough to prompt a first action associated with a first dwell time. However, the posture state classification may change before a second, longer dwell time elapses. Therefore, the second action associated with this posture state classification is never initiated, since posture state stability was not achieved for the second, longer dwell time.
  • a single programmable dwell time for all posture states or posture state transitions may be automatically selected based on monitored system conditions.
  • different dwell times may be selected for different types of responses.
  • the multiple dwell times may be programmable, automatically selected based on system conditions or some combination thereof.
  • Wireless telemetry between IMD 14 and external programmer 20, e.g., patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60, or another device may be accomplished by radio frequency (RF) communication or proximal inductive interaction of IMD 14 with external programmer 20.
  • RF radio frequency
  • Telemetry module 88 may send information to and receive information from external programmer 20 on a continuous basis, at periodic intervals, at non-periodic intervals, or upon request from the stimulator or programmer.
  • telemetry module 88 may include appropriate electronic components, such as amplifiers, filters, mixers, encoders, decoders, and the like.
  • Power source 90 delivers operating power to the components of IMD 14.
  • Power source 90 may include a small rechargeable or non-rechargeable battery and a power generation circuit to produce the operating power. Recharging may be accomplished through proximal inductive interaction between an external charger and an inductive charging coil within IMD 14.
  • external programmer 20 may include the charger to recharge power source 90 of IMD 14.
  • the programmer and charger may be integrated in the same device.
  • a charger unit may serve as an intermediate device that communicates with both the IMD and the programmer.
  • power requirements may be small enough to allow IMD 14 to utilize patient motion and implement a kinetic energy-scavenging device to trickle charge a rechargeable battery.
  • traditional batteries may be used for a limited period of time.
  • an external inductive power supply could transcutaneously power IMD 14 when needed or desired.
  • FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an IMD 26 that is a drug pump.
  • IMD 26 is a drug pump that operates substantially similar to IMD 14 of FIG. 4.
  • IMD 26 includes processor 92, memory 94, pump module 96, posture state module 98, dwell time module 99, telemetry module 100, and power source 102.
  • Dwell time module 99 may be substantially similar to dwell time module 89 (FIG. 4) of IMD 14.
  • IMD 26 includes pump module 96 for delivering drugs or some other therapeutic agent via catheter 28.
  • Pump module 96 may include a reservoir to hold the drug and a pump mechanism to force drug out of catheter 28 and into patient 12.
  • Processor 92 may control pump module 96 according to therapy instructions stored within memory 94.
  • memory 94 may contain the programs or groups of programs that define the drug delivery therapy for patient 12.
  • a program may indicate the bolus size or flow rate of the drug, and processor 92 may accordingly deliver therapy.
  • Processor 92 may also use posture state information from posture state module 98 to adjust drug delivery therapy when patient 12 changes posture states, e.g., adjusts his (or her) posture.
  • FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an external programmer 20 for IMD 14 or 26.
  • external programmer 20 includes processor 104, memory 108, telemetry module 110, user interface 106, and power source 112.
  • External programmer 20 may be embodied as patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
  • a clinician or patient 12 interacts with user interface 106 in order to manually change the stimulation parameters of a program, change programs within a group, turn posture responsive therapy ON or OFF, view therapy information, view posture state information, or otherwise communicate with IMD 14
  • User interface 106 may include a screen and one or more input buttons, as in the example of patient programmer 30, that allow external programmer 20 to receive input from a user.
  • user interface 106 may additionally or only utilize a touch screen display, as in the example of clinician programmer 60.
  • the screen may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or any other device capable of delivering and/or accepting information.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • touch screen or any other device capable of delivering and/or accepting information.
  • a display screen may suffice.
  • programmer 20 may further include one or more audio speakers, voice synthesizer chips, piezoelectric buzzers, or the like.
  • Input buttons for user interface 106 may include a touch pad, increase and decrease buttons, emergency shut off button, and other buttons needed to control the stimulation therapy, as described above with regard to patient programmer 30.
  • Processor 104 controls user interface 106, retrieves data from memory 108 and stores data within memory 108. Processor 104 also controls the transmission of data through telemetry module 110 to IMD 14 or 26. Memory 108 includes operation instructions for processor 104 and data related to patient 12 therapy. Telemetry module 110 allows the transfer of data to and from IMD 14, or IMD
  • Telemetry module 110 may communicate automatically with IMD 14 at a scheduled time or when the telemetry module detects the proximity of the stimulator. Alternatively, telemetry module 110 may communicate with IMD 14 when signaled by a user through user interface 106. To support RF communication, telemetry module 110 may include appropriate electronic components, such as amplifiers, filters, mixers, encoders, decoders, and the like. Power source 112 may be a rechargeable battery, such as a lithium ion or nickel metal hydride battery. Other rechargeable or conventional batteries may also be used. In some cases, external programmer 20 may be used when coupled to an alternating current (AC) outlet, i.e., AC line power, either directly or via an AC/DC adapter.
  • AC alternating current
  • Dwell time analysis, posture state detection, therapy adjustment, dwell time adjustment and other functions may be performed in IMD 14 or in programmer 20 or a combination of both in various example implementations. Also, in some instances, as illustrated by FIG. 7 below, such operations could be performed by one or more remote devices. Using telemetry, IMD 14 and programmer 20 may exchange information such that various operations may be performed in IMD 14 or programmer 20 or distributed between the two devices. For purposes of illustrations, application of dwell time analysis and adjustment will be described with respect to IMD 14, without limitation as to performance of some or all of such processes within programmer 20 or another device. External programmer 20 may be either patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an example system 120 that includes an external device, such as a server 122, and one or more computing devices 124A-124N, that are coupled to IMD 14 and external programmer 20 shown in FIGS. IA- 1C via a network 126.
  • IMD 14 may use its telemetry module 88 to communicate with external programmer 20 via a first wireless connection, and to communicate with an access point 128 via a second wireless connection.
  • IMD 26 may also be used in place of IMD 14, and external programmer 20 may be either patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
  • access point 128, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N are interconnected, and able to communicate with each other, through network 126.
  • one or more of access point 128, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N may be coupled to network 126 through one or more wireless connections.
  • IMD 14, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N may each comprise one or more processors, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic circuitry, or the like, that may perform various functions and operations, such as those described in this disclosure.
  • Access point 128 may comprise a device, such as a home monitoring device, that connects to network 126 via any of a variety of connections, such as telephone dial-up, digital subscriber line (DSL), or cable modem connections. In other examples, access point 128 may be coupled to network 126 through different forms of connections, including wired or wireless connections.
  • IMD 14 may collect and store various forms of data. For example, IMD 14 may collect sensed posture state information during therapy delivery that indicate how patient 12 moves throughout each day. In some cases, IMD 14 may directly analyze the collected data to evaluate the posture state of patient 12, such as what percentage of time patient 12 was in each identified posture state. In other cases, however, IMD 14 may send stored data relating to posture state information to external programmer 20 and/or server 122, either wirelessly or via access point 128 and network 126, for remote processing and analysis. For example, IMD 14 may sense, process, trend and evaluate the sensed posture state information. Alternatively, processing, trending and evaluation functions may be distributed to other devices such as external programmer 20 or server 122, which are coupled to network 126. In addition, posture state information may be archived by any of such devices, e.g., for later retrieval and analysis by a clinician.
  • IMD 14, external programmer 20 or server 122 may process posture state information or raw data and/or therapy information into a displayable posture state report, which may be displayed via external programmer 20 or one of computing devices 124A-124N.
  • the posture state report may contain trend data for evaluation by a clinician, e.g., by visual inspection of graphic data.
  • the posture state report may include the number of activities patient 12 conducted, a percentage of time patient 12 was in each posture state, the average time patient 12 was continuously within a posture state, what group or program was being used to deliver therapy during each activity, the number of adjustments to therapy during each respective posture state, or any other information relevant to patient 12 therapy, based on analysis and evaluation performed automatically by IMD 14, external programmer 20 or server 122.
  • a clinician or other trained professional may review and/or annotate the posture state report, and possibly identify any problems or issues with the therapy that should be addressed.
  • server 122 may be configured to provide a secure storage site for archival of posture state information that has been collected from IMD 14 and/or external programmer 20.
  • Network 126 may comprise a local area network, wide area network, or global network, such as the Internet.
  • external programmer 20 or server 122 may assemble posture state information in web pages or other documents for viewing by trained professionals, such as clinicians, via viewing terminals associated with computing devices 124A-124N.
  • System 120 may be implemented, in some aspects, with general network technology and functionality similar to that provided by the Medtronic CareLink® Network developed by Medtronic, Inc., of Minneapolis, MN.
  • system 120 may be employed to distribute any information relating to the treatment of patient 12 and the operation of any device associated therewith.
  • system 120 may allow therapy errors or device errors to be immediately reported to the clinician.
  • system 120 may allow the clinician to remotely intervene in the therapy and reprogram IMD 14, patient programmer 30, or communicate with patient 12.
  • the clinician may utilize system 120 to monitor multiple patients and share data with other clinicians in an effort to coordinate rapid evolution of effective treatment of patients.
  • posture state information may be important, such as, e.g., DBS, pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, occipital stimulation, functional electrical stimulation, and the like.
  • techniques for evaluating posture state information may be applied to IMDs that are generally dedicated to sensing or monitoring and do not include stimulation or other therapy components.
  • FIGS. 8A-8C are conceptual illustrations of posture state spaces 140, 152, 155 within which posture state reference data may define the posture state of patient 12.
  • Posture state reference data may define certain regions associated with particular posture states of patient 12 within the respective posture state spaces 140, 152, 155.
  • the output of one or more posture state sensors may be analyzed by posture state module 86 with respect to posture state spaces 140, 152, 155 to determine the posture state of patient 12. For example, if the output of one or more posture state sensors is within a particular posture region defined by posture state reference data, posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is within the posture state associated with the respective posture state region.
  • one or more posture state regions may be defined as posture state cones. Posture state cones may be used to define a posture state of patient 12 based on the output from a posture state sensor of a posture state according to an example method for posture state detection.
  • a posture state cone may be centered about a posture state reference coordinate vector that corresponds to a particular posture state.
  • the posture state module 86 of IMD 14 or IMD 26 may use a posture state sensor, e.g., a three-axis accelerometer that provides data indicating the posture state of patient 12, to sense posture vectors. While the sensed data may be indicative of any posture state, postures of patient 12 will generally be used below to illustrate the concept of posture cones.
  • posture state space 140 represents a vertical plane dividing patient 12 from left and right sides, or the sagittal plane.
  • a posture state parameter value from two axes of the posture state sensor may be used to determine the current posture state of patient 12 according to the posture state space 140.
  • the posture state data may include x, y and z coordinate values.
  • a posture cone may be defined by a reference coordinate vector for a given posture state in combination with a distance or angle defining a range of coordinate vectors within a cone surrounding the posture reference coordinate vector.
  • a posture cone may be defined by a reference coordinate vector and a range of cosine values computed using the reference coordinate vector as an adjacent vector and any of the outermost vectors of the cone as a hypotenuse vector.
  • posture state vector is determined to reside within the posture cone defined by the reference coordinate vector.
  • Posture state space 140 is segmented into different posture cones that are indicative of a certain posture state of patient 12.
  • upright cone 142 indicates that patient 12 is sitting or standing upright
  • lying back cone 148 indicates that patient 12 is lying back down
  • lying front cone 144 indicates that patient 12 is lying chest down
  • inverted cone 146 indicates that patient 12 is in an inverted position.
  • Other cones may be provided, e.g., to indicate that patient 12 is lying on the right side or left side.
  • a lying right posture cone and a lying left posture cone positioned outside of the sagittal plane illustrated in FIG. 8 A.
  • the lying right and lying left posture cones may be positioned in a coronal plane substantially perpendicular to the sagittal plane illustrated in FIG. 8A.
  • lying right and lying left cones are not shown in FIG. 8A.
  • posture cones may have respective posture reference coordinate vectors that are not orthogonal in some cases.
  • individual reference coordinate vectors for cones 142 and 146 may not share the same axis, and reference coordinate vectors for cones 144 and 148 may not share the same axis.
  • reference coordinate vectors for cones 144 and 148 may or may not be orthogonal to reference coordinates vectors for cones 142, 146. Therefore, although orthogonal axes are shown in FIG. 8A for purposes of illustration, respective posture cones may be defined by individualized reference coordinate vectors for the cones.
  • IMD 14 may monitor the posture state parameter value of the posture state sensor to produce a sensed coordinate vector and identify the current posture of patient 12 by identifying which cone the sensed coordinated vector of the posture state sensor module 86 resides. For example, if the posture state parameter value corresponds to a sensed coordinate vector that falls within lying front cone 144, IMD 14 determines that patient 12 is lying down on their chest. IMD 14 may store this posture information as a determined posture state or as raw output from the posture state sensor, change therapy according to the posture, or both. Additionally, IMD 14 may communicate the posture information to patient programmer 30 so that the patient programmer can present a posture state indication to patient 12.
  • posture state area 140 may include hysteresis zones 150A, 150B, 150C, and 150D (collectively “hysteresis zones 150").
  • Hysteresis zones 150 are positions within posture state area 140 where no posture cones have been defined.
  • Hysteresis zones 150 may be particularly useful when IMD 14 utilizes the posture state information and posture cones to adjust therapy automatically. If the posture state sensor indicates that patient 12 is in upright cone 142, IMD 14 would not detect that patient 12 has entered a new posture cone until the posture state parameter value indicates a different posture cone. For example, if IMD 14 determines that patient 12 moves to within hysteresis zone 150A from upright cone 142, IMD 14 retains the posture as upright. In this manner, IMD 14 does not change the corresponding therapy until patient 12 fully enters a different posture cone. Hysteresis zones 150 prevent IMD 14 from continually oscillating between different therapies when patient 12's posture state resides near a posture cone boundary.
  • Each posture cone 142, 144, 146, 148 may be defined by an angle in relation to a reference coordinate vector defined for the respective posture cone.
  • some posture cones may be defined by an angle relative to a reference coordinate vector for another posture cone.
  • lying postures may be defined by an angle with respect to a reference coordinate vector for an upright posture cone.
  • each posture cone may be defined by an angle in relation to a reference coordinate posture vector defined for a particular posture state.
  • the reference coordinate vector may be defined based on posture sensor data generated by a posture state sensor while patient 12 occupies a particular posture state desired to be defined using the reference coordinate vector.
  • a patient may be asked to occupy a posture so that a reference coordinate vector can be sensed for the respective posture.
  • vertical axis 141 may be specified according to the patient's actual orientation.
  • a posture cone can be defined using the reference coordinate vector as the center of the cone.
  • Vertical axis 141 in FIG. 8 A may correspond to a reference coordinate vector sensed while the patient was occupying an upright posture state.
  • a horizontal axis 143 may correspond to a reference coordinate vector sensed while the patient is occupying a lying posture state.
  • a posture cone may be defined with respect to the reference coordinate vector.
  • a single axis is shown extending through the upright and inverted cones 142, 146, and another single axis is shown extending through the lying down and lying up cones 144, 148, individual reference coordinate vectors may be used for respective cones, and the reference coordinate vectors may not share the same axes, depending on differences between the reference coordinate vectors obtained for the posture cones.
  • Posture cones may be defined by the same angle or different angles, symmetrical to either axis, or asymmetrical to either axis.
  • upright cone 142 may have an angle of eighty degrees, +40 degrees to -40 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141.
  • lying cones may be defined relative to the reference coordinate vector of the upright cone 142.
  • lying up (lying back) cone 148 may have an angle of eighty degrees, -50 degrees to -130 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141.
  • Inverted cone 146 may have an angle of eighty degrees, -140 degrees to +140 degrees from vertical axis 141.
  • lying down (lying front) cone 144 may have an angle of eighty degrees, +50 degrees to +130 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141.
  • each posture cone may have varying angle definitions, and the angles may change during therapy delivery to achieve the most effective therapy for patient 12.
  • posture cones 144, 146, 148, 148 may be defined by a cosine value or range of cosine values in relation to vertical axis 141, horizontal axis 143, or some other axis, such as, e.g., individual reference coordinate vectors for the respective cones.
  • a posture cone may be defined by a cosine value that defines the minimum cosine value, calculated using a reference coordinate vector and a respective coordinate vector sensed by a posture state sensor at any point in time.
  • the value (adjacent/hypotenuse) can be computed using the magnitude of the coordinate reference vector as the adjacent and a vector at the outermost extent of the cone as the hypotenuse to define a range of cosine values consistent with the outer bound of the cone.
  • the cosine range may extend from the maximum cosine value of 1.0, corresponding to a sensed vector that matches the reference coordinate vector of the upright cone, to a minimum cosine value that corresponds to a sensed vector at the outer limit of the upright cone.
  • the cosine range may extend from the maximum cosine value of 1.0, corresponding to a sensed vector that matches the reference coordinate vector of the lying cone, to a minimum cosine value that corresponds to a sensed vector at the outer limit of the lying cone.
  • the lying cone 144 may be defined with reference to the upright cone 142, such that the cosine range may extend between a maximum and minimum values determined relative to the reference coordinate vector for the upright cone.
  • example posture state area 140 may include additional posture cones than those shown in FIG. 8A.
  • a reclining cone may be located between upright cone 142 and lying back cone 148 to indicate when patient 12 is reclining back (e.g., in a dorsal direction). In this position, patient 12 may need a different therapy to effectively treat symptoms.
  • Different therapy programs may provide efficacious therapy to patient 12 when patient 12 is in each of an upright posture (e.g., within upright cone 142), lying back posture (e.g., within lying back cone 148), and a reclining back posture.
  • a posture cone that defines the reclining back posture may be useful for providing efficacious posture-responsive therapy to patient 12.
  • posture state area 140 may include fewer posture cones than cones 142, 144, 146, 148 shown in FIG. 8 A.
  • inverted cone 146 may be replaced by a larger lying back cone 148 and lying front cone 144.
  • FIG. 8B illustrates an example posture state space 152 that is a three-dimensional space in which the posture state parameter value from the posture state sensor is placed in relation to the posture cones.
  • Posture state space 152 is substantially similar to posture state area 140 of FIG. 8 A.
  • the posture state parameter value derived from all three axes of a 3 -axis accelerometer may be used to accurately determine the posture state of patient 12.
  • FIG. 8A illustrates an example posture state space 152 that is a three-dimensional space in which the posture state parameter value from the posture state sensor is placed in relation to the posture cones.
  • Posture state space 152 is substantially similar to posture state area 140 of FIG. 8 A.
  • the posture state parameter value derived from all three axes of a 3 -axis accelerometer
  • posture state space 152 includes upright cone 154, lying back cone 156, and lying front cone 158.
  • Posture state space 152 also includes hysteresis zones (not shown) similar to those of posture state area 140.
  • the hysteresis zones are the spaces not occupied by a posture cone, e.g., upright cone 154, lying back cone 156, and lying front cone 158.
  • Posture cones 154, 156 and 158 also are defined by a respective center line
  • upright cone 154 is defined by center line 153 A that runs through the center of upright cone 154.
  • Center line 153 A may correspond to an axis of the posture state sensor or some other calibrated vector.
  • each center line 153 A, 153B, 153C may correspond to a posture reference coordinate vectors defined for the respective postures, e.g., the upright posture. For instance, assuming that patient 12 is standing, the DC portion of the x, y, and z signals detected by the posture state sensor of posture state module 86 define a posture vector that corresponds to center line 153 A.
  • the x, y, and z signals may be measured while patient 12 is known to be in a specified position, e.g., standing, and the measured vector may be correlated with the upright posture state. Thereafter, when the DC portions of the posture state sensor signal are within some predetermined cone tolerance or proximity, e.g., as defined by an angle, distance or cosine value, of the posture reference coordinate vector (i.e., center line 153A), it may be determined that patient 12 is in the upright posture.
  • a sensed posture coordinate vector may be initially measured based on the output of one or more posture state sensors of posture state module 86, associated with a posture state, such as upright, as a reference coordinate vector, and then later used to detect a patient's posture state.
  • the definition of a posture state may generally include not only a posture reference coordinate vector (e.g., center line 153A), but also a specified tolerance.
  • a posture reference coordinate vector e.g., center line 153A
  • One way to specify a tolerance is by providing an angle, such as cone angle A, relative to coordinate reference vector 153 A, which results in posture cone 154 as described herein.
  • Cone angle A is the deflection angle, or radius, of upright cone 154.
  • the total angle that each posture cone spans is double the cone angle.
  • the cone angles A, B, and C may be generally between approximately 1 degree and approximately 70 degrees. In other examples, cone angles A, B, and C may be between approximately 10 degrees and 30 degrees. In the example of FIG. 8B, cone angles A, B, and C are approximately 20 degrees. Cone angles A, B, and C may be different, and center lines 153 A, 153B, and 153C may not be orthogonal to each other.
  • a tolerance may be specified by a cosine value or range of cosine values.
  • cosine values may provide substantial processing efficiencies.
  • a minimum cosine value determined using the reference coordinate vector as adjacent and sensed coordinate vector as hypotenuse, indicates the range of vectors inside the cone. If a sensed coordinate vector, in conjunction with the reference coordinate vector for a posture cone, produces a cosine value that is less than the minimum cosine value for the posture cone, the sensed coordinate vector does not reside within the pertinent posture cone.
  • the minimum cosine value may define the outer bound of a range of cosine values within a particular posture cone defined in part by a reference coordinate vector.
  • center lines 153A, 153B, 153C of each of the posture cones 154, 156, 158, respectively, are shown in FIG. 8B as being substantially orthogonal to each other, in other examples, center lines 153 A, 153B, and 153C may not be orthogonal to each other. Again, the relative orientation of center lines 153 A, 153B, 153C may depend on the actual reference coordinate vector output of the posture state sensor of posture state module 86 of IMD 14 when patient 12 occupies the respective postures.
  • all of the posture cones may be individually defined based on actual reference coordinate vectors.
  • some posture cones may be defined with reference to one or more reference coordinate vectors for one or more other posture cones.
  • lying reference coordinate vectors could be assumed to be orthogonal to an upright reference coordinate vector.
  • lying reference coordinate vectors could be individually determined based on sensed coordinate vectors when the patient is in respective lying postures.
  • the actual reference coordinate vectors for different postures may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal with respect to one another.
  • posture state space 152 may include additional posture cones.
  • a lying right cone may be provided to define a patient posture in which patient 12 is lying on his right side and a lying left cone may be provided to define a patient posture in which patient 12 is lying on his left side.
  • the lying right cone and lying left cone may be positioned approximately orthogonal to upright cones 154, in approximately the same plane as lying back cone 156 and lying front cone 158.
  • posture state space 152 may include an inverted cone positioned approximately opposite of upright cone 154. Such a cone indicates that the patient's posture is inverted from the upright posture, i.e., upside down.
  • posture state module 86 of IMD 14 may determine a sensed coordinate vector based on the posture sensor data generated by one or more posture state sensors, and then analyze the sensed coordinate vector with respect to posture cones 154, 156, 158 of FIG. 8B.
  • posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 154 by calculating the angle between the sensed coordinate vector and reference coordinate vector, and then determine whether the angle is less than the tolerance angle "A.” If so, posture state module 86 determines that the sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 154 and detects that patient 12 is in the upright posture. If posture state module 86 determines that sensed coordinate vector is not within upright posture cone 154, posture state module 86 detects that patient 12 is not in the upright posture.
  • a tolerance angle e.g., tolerance angle "A”
  • Posture state module 86 may analyze the sensed coordinate vector in posture state space 152 with respect to each individual defined posture cone, such as posture cones 156 and 158, in such a manner to determine the posture state of patient 12. For example, posture state module 86 may determine the angle between the sensed coordinate vector and reference coordinate vector of individual posture cones defined for the posture state, and compare the determined angle to the tolerance angle defined for the respective posture cone. In this manner, a sensed coordinate vector may be evaluated against each posture cone until a match is detected, i.e., until the sensed coordinate vector is found to reside in one of the posture cones. Hence, a cone-by-cone analysis is one option for posture detection.
  • posture detection analysis techniques may be applied. For example, instead of testing a sensed coordinate vector against posture cones on a cone-by-cone basis, a phased approach may be applied where the sensed coordinate vector is classified as either upright or not upright. In this case, if the sensed coordinate vector is not in the upright cone, posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinate vector is in a lying posture, either by testing the sensed coordinate vector against individual lying posture cones or testing the sensed coordinate vector against a generalized lying posture volume, such as a donut- or toroid-like volume that includes all of the lying postures, and may be defined using an angle or cosine range relative to the upright vector, or relative to a modified or virtual upright vector as will be described.
  • a phased approach may be applied where the sensed coordinate vector is classified as either upright or not upright.
  • posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinate vector is in a lying posture, either by testing the sensed coordinate vector against individual lying posture cones or testing the sensed coordinate vector against a generalized
  • the lying volume could be defined as a logical OR of the donut- or toroid-like volume and the volumes of the lying posture cones. If the cones are larger such that some portions extend beyond the lying volume, then those portions can be added to the lying volume using the logical OR-like operation.
  • the sensed coordinate vector may be tested against each of a plurality of lying posture cones in the lying volume.
  • the posture detection technique may not use lying cones.
  • a posture detection technique may rely on a proximity test between the sensed coordinate vector and each of the reference coordinate vectors for the respective lying postures. The proximity test may rely on angle, cosine value or distance to determine which of the lying posture reference coordinate vectors is closest to the sensed coordinate vector. For example, the reference coordinate vector that produces the largest cosine value with the sensed coordinate vector as hypotenuse and the reference coordinate vector as adjacent is the closest reference coordinate vector.
  • posture state module 86 may first determine whether patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state or upright posture state by analyzing the sensed coordinate vector in posture state space 152 with respect to an axis 153 A for the upright posture state.
  • Axis 153 A may correspond to the upright reference coordinate vector.
  • angle "A” may be used to define upright posture cone 154, as described above, and angles "D” and “E” may be used to define the vector space in which patient 12 may be generally considered to be in the lying posture state, regardless of the particular posture state cone, e.g., lying front cone 158, lying back cone 156, lying right cone (not shown), or lying left cone (not shown), in which the sensed coordinate vector falls. If it is determined that a sensed coordinate vector is not within an angle A of the axis 153 A, then it may be determined that the patient is not in the upright posture indicated by the upright posture cone.
  • a sensed coordinated vector is generally in a lying posture space volume, which may be considered somewhat donut- or toroid-like, and may be defined relative to the upright reference coordinate vector 153 A.
  • angles "D" and “E” define the minimum and maximum angle values, respectively, that a sensed vector may form with respect to axis 153 A of patient 12 for a determination to be made that the patient is generally in the lying posture state.
  • cosine values may be used instead of angles to determine the positions of sensed coordinate vectors relative to posture cones or other posture volumes, or relative to reference coordinate vectors.
  • angles "D" and "E' may be defined with respect to vertical axis 153 A (which may correspond to an upright reference coordinate vector), which is the reference coordinate vector for the upright posture cone, rather than with respect to a reference coordinate vector of a lying posture state cone. If a sensed vector is within the angular range of D to E, relative to axis 153 A, then it can be determined by posture state module 86 that the patient is generally in a lying posture. Alternatively, in some examples, an angle C could be defined according to a generally horizontal axis 153C (which may correspond to one of the lying reference coordinate vectors).
  • posture state module 86 determines whether a sensed vector is within angle C of axis 153C.
  • the region generally defining the lying posture state may be referred to as a posture donut or posture toroid, rather than a posture cone.
  • the posture donut may generally encompass a range of vectors that are considered to be representative of various lying down postures.
  • posture state module 86 may rely on cosine values or a range of cosine values to define the posture donut or toroid with respect to axis 153 A.
  • posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state. For example, if the sensed vector and reference coordinate vector 153 produce a cosine value in a first range, the posture is upright. If the cosine value is in a second range, the posture is lying. If the cosine value is outside of the first and second ranges, the posture may be indeterminate.
  • the first range may correspond to the range of cosine values that would be produced by vectors in posture cone 154 defined by angle A
  • the second range may be correspond to cosine values that would be produced by vectors in the posture donut defined by angles D and E.
  • posture state module 86 may then determine the particular lying posture state occupied by patient 12, e.g., lying front, lying back, lying right, or lying left. To determine the particular lying posture state occupied by patient 12, posture state module 86 may analyze the sensed vector with respect to reference coordinate vectors for individual lying posture state cones, e.g., lying front cone 156, lying back cone 158, lying right cone (not shown), and lying left cone (not shown), using one more techniques previously described, such as angle or cosine techniques.
  • individual lying posture state cones e.g., lying front cone 156, lying back cone 158, lying right cone (not shown), and lying left cone (not shown
  • posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinated vector resides within one of the lying posture state cones and, if so, select the posture state corresponding to that cone as the detected posture state.
  • FIG. 8C illustrates an example posture state space 155 that is a three- dimensional space substantially similar to posture state space 152 of FIG. 8B.
  • Posture state space 155 includes upright posture cone 157 defined by reference coordinate vector 167.
  • the tolerance that defines upright posture cone 157 with respect to reference coordinate vector 167 may include a tolerance angle or cosine value, as described above.
  • posture state space 155 includes four reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165, which are associated with lying left, lying right, lying front, and lying back posture states, respectively.
  • Posture state module 86 may have defined each of the four reference coordinated vector 159, 161, 163, 165 based on the output of one or more posture sensors while patient 12 occupied each of the corresponding posture states.
  • lying front and lying back posture cones 158, 156 in the example of FIG.
  • the posture state reference data for the four defined posture states corresponding to reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 need not include angles defined relative to the respective reference vector in a manner that defines a posture cone. Rather, as will be described below, the respective posture state reference vectors may be analyzed with respect to one another in terms of cosine values to determine which particular reference coordinate vector is nearest in proximity to a sensed coordinate vector.
  • posture state module 85 may determine whether a sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 157 by analyzing the sensed coordinate vector in view of the tolerance angle or cosine value(s) defined with respect to upright posture reference coordinate vector 167, or whether the sensed vector is within a posture donut or toroid defined by a range of angles (as in FIG. 8B) or cosine values with respect to upright posture reference coordinate vector 167, in which case posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is in a general lying posture state.
  • posture state module 86 may then calculate the cosine value of the sensed coordinate vector with respect to each lying reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165. In such a case, posture state module 86 determines the particular lying posture state of patient 12, i.e., lying left, lying right, lying front, lying back, based on which cosine value is the greatest of the four cosine values.
  • posture state module 85 may determine that patient 12 is occupying a lying front posture state.
  • posture state module 86 may determine whether patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state based on the relationship of a sensed vector to upright reference vector 167.
  • a lying posture donut or toroid may be defined with respect to upright posture reference vector 167, e.g., using angles D and E as in FIG. 8B.
  • Such a technique may be appropriate when lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 define a common plane substantially orthogonal to upright posture reference vector 167.
  • the lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 may not in fact be orthogonal to the upright reference coordinate vector 167.
  • the lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 may not reside in the same plane.
  • a lying posture donut or toroid may be defined with respect to a modified or virtual upright reference vector 169 rather than that actual upright posture reference vector 167.
  • a technique may be used in situations in which the lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 are not in a common plane, or the common plane of reference vector 159, 161, 163, 165 is not substantially orthogonal to upright reference vector 167.
  • use of the example technique is not limited to such situations.
  • posture state module 86 may compute the cross-products of various combinations of lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 and average the cross product values.
  • posture state module 86 may compute four cross products and average the four cross product vectors to yield the virtual upright vector.
  • the cross product operations that may be performed are: lying left vector 159 x lying back vector 165, lying back vector 165 x lying right vector 161, lying right vector 161 x lying front vector 163, and lying front vector 163 x lying left vector 159.
  • Each cross product yields a vector that is orthogonal to the two lying reference vectors that were crossed.
  • Averaging each of the cross product vectors yields a virtual upright reference vector that is orthogonal to lying plane 171 approximately formed by lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165.
  • posture state module 86 may define a lying posture donut or toroid in a manner similar to that described with respect to upright reference vector 167, but instead with respect to virtual upright reference vector 169. In particular, when posture state module 86 determines that the patient is not in the upright posture, the posture state module determines whether the patient is in a lying posture based on an angle or cosine value with respect to the virtual upright reference vector 169.
  • Posture state module 86 may still determine whether patient 12 is in an upright posture state using upright posture cone 157. If posture state module 86 determines that patient 12 is occupying a general lying posture state based on the analysis of the sensed coordinate vector with respect to virtual upright reference vector 169, posture state module 86 may then calculate the cosine value of the sensed coordinate vector (as hypotenuse) with respect to each lying reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 (as adjacent).
  • posture state module 86 determines the particular lying posture state of patient 12, i.e., lying left, lying right, lying front, lying back, based on which cosine value is the greatest of the four cosine values. For example, if the cosine value calculated with the lying front reference vector 163 is the largest value of the four cosine values, the sensed vector may be considered closest in proximity to lying front reference vector out of the four total reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165. Accordingly, posture state module 85 may determine that patient 12 is occupying a lying front posture state.
  • posture state definitions are not limited to posture cones. For example, a definition of a posture state may involve a posture vector and a tolerance, such as a maximum distance from the posture vector.
  • posture states may be detected without calculating angles, e.g., as described above with respect to the description of posture cones.
  • posture states may be defined that are specific to a particular patient's activities and/or profession. For instance, a bank teller may spend a significant portion of his working day leaning forward at a particular angle. Apatient- specific "Leaning Forward" posture state including this angle may be defined. The cone angle or other tolerance value selected for this posture state may be specific to the particular posture state definition for this patient. In this manner, the defined posture states may be tailored to a specific user, and need not be "hard-coded" in the IMD. In some examples, individual posture states may be linked together, thereby tying posture states to a common set of posture reference data and a common set of therapy parameter values.
  • This may, in effect, merge multiple posture cones for purposes of posture state-based selection of therapy parameter values.
  • all lying posture state cones back, front, left, right
  • could be treated as one cone or a donut/toroid e.g., using a technique the same as or similar to that described with respect to FIGS. 8B and 8C to define a donut, toroid or other volume.
  • One program group or common set of therapy parameter values may apply to all posture states in the same merged cone, according to the linking status of the posture states, as directed via external programmer 20.
  • Merging posture cones or otherwise linking a plurality of posture states together may be useful for examples in which a common set of therapy parameter values provides efficacious therapy to patient 12 for the plurality of posture states.
  • linking a plurality of posture states together may help decrease the power consumption required to provide posture-responsive therapy to patient 12 because the computation required to track patient posture states and provide responsive therapy adjustments may be minimized when a plurality of posture states are linked together.
  • Linking of posture states also may permit a therapy parameter value adjustment in one posture state to be associated with multiple posture states at the same time.
  • the same amplitude level for one or more programs may be applied to all of the posture states in a linked set of posture states.
  • the lying down posture states may all reside within a "donut" or toroid that would be used instead of separate comes 156 and 158, for example.
  • the toroid may be divided into sectional segments that each correspond to different posture states, such as lying (back), lying (front), lying (right), lying (left) instead of individual cones. In this case, different posture reference data and therapy parameter values may be assigned to the different sectional segments of the toroid.
  • a posture state definition may also include an activity component, e.g., an activity level, in addition to a posture component, e.g., a posture cone.
  • an activity component e.g., an activity level
  • a posture component e.g., a posture cone.
  • an "upright active" posture state may be defined by upright posture cone 154 in combination with a “medium” or “high” activity level.
  • the "upright” posture state may be defined by upright posture cone 154 in combination with a “low” activity level.
  • other gradations e.g., high, medium high, medium, medium low, and low, or numerical scales may be used to characterize activity level.
  • patient 12 will occupy different posture states as he goes about daily life. For instance, when patient 12 is in an upright position such that the posture state parameter value lies within upright posture cone 154, posture state module 86 will detect the patient's posture state as upright. If patient 12 transitions from the upright position to lying on his back, the detected posture state parameter value will transition from being located within upright cone 154 into the space that is not associated with any posture state definition. From there, the detected posture state parameter value will transition into lying back cone 156, which indicates that patient 12 is lying on his back.
  • patient 12 may be receiving some therapy associated with the upright posture state while the detected posture state parameter value resides within upright cone 154.
  • This therapy may optionally continue as the posture state parameter value enters the space that is not associated with any defined posture state or some other therapy may be delivered during this time.
  • some change in therapy may be initiated as the detected posture state parameter value enters lying back cone 156, which indicate that patient 12 is lying on his back.
  • a change in therapy may be initiated as the patient's posture state is reclassified.
  • some other action may be taken as a result of this posture state reclassification.
  • a dwell time may be imposed between the time the patient's posture state is reclassified from a previous posture state to a newly detected posture state and the time a response is initiated as a result of this reclassification.
  • This dwell time may, if desired, be programmable, and may be different for different posture states or different posture state transitions.
  • the dwell time may be selected based on the patient's previous posture state classification (in this example, the upright posture state).
  • the dwell time may be selected based on the newly-assumed posture state (in this example, the lying back posture state).
  • this dwell time may be selected based on the particular posture state transition (e.g., upright to lying back) that was experienced by patient 12.
  • the dwell times may further be specific to a particular type of response or action that is to be initiated, such as therapy adjustment of notification of posture change.
  • dwell time may serve to stabilize the system by ensuring that transient, temporarily-assumed posture states do not prompt a therapy adjustment or other response. If the detected posture state is only transitory, as may be the case if patient 12 is transitioning to a final posture state by assuming one or more temporary posture states, the temporarily-assumed posture states will not cause delivered therapy to be adjusted in an unwanted or premature manner. Moreover, if patient 12 aborts a posture state transition, as by changing his mind mid- way through the transition, the aborted transition likewise will not prompt a therapy change if the dwell time is not exceeded while the patient is in the transient posture state. Instead, the therapy is not adjusted and continues to be delivered in a manner appropriate for the previous stable posture.
  • a dwell time may be selected that is specific to a particular response.
  • more than one response may be initiated.
  • One such response may involve adjustment of a therapy parameter, e.g., an increase or decrease of an amplitude used to deliver stimulation therapy.
  • Another response may involve initiation of a different therapy, e.g., initiation of administration of a therapeutic substance to patient 12.
  • Yet another response may involve providing some type of notification to external programmer 20, e.g., patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
  • a different dwell time may be imposed.
  • dwell times if desired, may be posture state-specific, posture state transition-specific, and/or response- specific.
  • patient 12 While patient 12 resides in a given posture state or transitions between posture states, he may make therapy adjustments, e.g., manually via patient programmer 30. In some cases, patient 12 may make therapy adjustments relative to therapy delivered automatically by IMD 14 based on posture state detection. Hence, patient 12 may manually override some automated therapy parameter settings in some instances. Patient therapy adjustments may indicate that automated therapy parameter settings are not appropriate for patient 12 in a given posture state, or that it may be desirable to adjust the automated therapy parameter settings in order to improve therapeutic efficacy. A clinician may analyze patient therapy adjustment data to adjust therapy parameter settings for various posture states. Alternatively, or additionally, IMD 14 may be configured to automatically adjust therapy based on patient therapy adjustment data.
  • patient therapy adjustments may provide an indication that dwell times are too short or too long. In this case, it may be desirable to adjust the dwell time based on patient therapy adjustment data.
  • patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 (which may be a patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60). Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted by IMD 14, programmer 20, or a user such as a clinician.
  • the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may record and analyze therapy adjustment data indicating therapy adjustments may by a user, such as a patient.
  • the therapy adjustments may be manual therapy adjustments entered by a user via programmer 30.
  • the therapy adjustment data may indicate the timing of the therapy adjustments relative to dwell time and detected posture states, the parameters that were adjusted, the parameter values selected by the user, and other pertinent therapy adjustment information.
  • the therapy adjustment data may be analyzed automatically by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 to determine whether the dwell time should be adjusted. If so, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may automatically adjust the dwell time. In other examples, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may store patient therapy adjustment data for analysis by a clinician. The clinician then may consider adjustments to dwell time or dwell times based on the therapy adjustment data.
  • the patient therapy adjustment data may be collected and stored by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 during a therapy session in which IMD 14 delivers therapy to patient 12, between successive programming sessions. IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may automatically adjust dwell time during a therapy session. Alternatively, a clinician may analyzed the patient therapy adjustment data during the next programming session, e.g., in-clinic, and adjust the programming of IMD 14 to apply adjusted dwell time or dwell times in the next therapy session.
  • a therapy adjustment that is entered after the detection of a newly detected posture state but before expiration of the dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would like IMD 14 to transition more quickly to particular therapy setting upon reaching the new posture state.
  • patient 12 may experience lack of pain coverage or other discomfort if IMD 14 does not deliver a therapy adjustment until expiration of a prolonged dwell time. Instead, patient 12 may desire that the therapy adjustment be delivered more quickly upon detection of the new posture state.
  • IMD 14, programmer 20 or a user such as a clinician may determine that the pertinent dwell time is too long and should be shortened. By shortening the length of the dwell time, IMD 12 may respond more quickly to the detected posture state and thereby provide the therapy adjustment to patient 12 more quickly upon assuming the detected posture state.
  • IMD 14, programmer 20 or a clinician may determine that the patient is not yet in need of the therapy adjustment for the newly detected posture state. For example, if patient 12 does begin to feel adverse effects on efficacy until some period of time after a posture state has stabilized, i.e., until some time after the dwell time, the patient may seek to return to the previous therapy setting, which may have been comfortable for the previous stable posture.
  • the patient may feel more comfortable with the previous therapy parameters delivered for the previous posture state.
  • IMD 14, programmer 20 or a clinician may determine that the length of the dwell time should be increased.
  • a therapy adjustment made after expiration of the dwell time may be evaluated to determine whether it is consistent with a return close to or toward the therapy delivered for the previous stable posture as additional confirmation that it may be desirable to lengthen the dwell time.
  • IMD 14, programmer 20, or a combination of both may perform a method comprising delivering therapy to a patient, and detecting a posture state transition of a patient.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may adjust the therapy based on the posture state transition, detect a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjust the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time.
  • the dwell time may be adjusted if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold.
  • the dwell time may be reduced based on patient adjustment timing if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time, or increased based on patient adjustment timing if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may determine whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition, and adjust the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time and the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition.
  • Therapy may be adjusted based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, where at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions.
  • adjusting the dwell time may include adjusting different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient therapy adjustments detected during or after the respective dwell times.
  • FIG. 9A is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to one example.
  • This diagram illustrates using detection of posture states to control delivery of therapy, although such detection may be used for initiating other responses, such as notification or data storage, as discussed above.
  • IMD 14 delivers therapy with therapy parameters that have been specified for the particular posture state, or perhaps a group of posture states.
  • the therapy will be described in terms of a adjustment of therapy amplitude, referred to as a therapy level, although other therapy adjustments may be made.
  • IMD 14 delivers the therapy at a first therapy level
  • a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. It will be assumed that a different therapy level, Therapy Level 2, has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to Therapy Level 2 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed.
  • a timer/counter which may be referred to as a "dwell timer” is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change. Different dwell times may be used for different posture states or posture state transitions, or the same dwell time could be use for all posture states and posture state transitions.
  • the dwell time may be selected based on the particular posture state change or transition that is occurring (e.g., upright to lying front, lying front to lying back, or the like), based on the most-recent stable posture state, based on the newly-detected posture state, based on a response type (e.g., therapy adjustment, notification, or data storage), and/or based on some other monitored condition.
  • the dwell time DTl may be selected based on the previous stable posture state PSl that was assumed by patient 12 prior to the most recent posture state transition.
  • the dwell time DTl may instead be selected based on the newly-detected posture PS2.
  • the specific transition from PSl to PS2 may be used to select the dwell time.
  • Other system conditions such as physiological conditions of patient 12, e.g., heart rate or blood pressure, may be used to select dwell time.
  • dwell time DTl expires at time T2, as indicated by arrow 220. Since the patient's posture state did not change throughout the dwell time, upon expiration of this dwell time, the level of therapy delivery is changed from Therapy Level 1 , which is associated with PS 1 , to Therapy Level 2, which is associated with PS2. This change may occur as a single step function, as shown by step function 224. However, in another example, the change will occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function by which the therapy level changes somewhat gradually in a series of small steps or a continuous change. For more gradual adjustment, any type of linear or non- linear ramp or exponential attack function may be used, as shown by dashed lines 226, to achieve the target Therapy Level 2.
  • the type of ramp or attack function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level occurs may be programmable.
  • the patient's posture state again reverts to posture state PSl.
  • a dwell time is imposed.
  • the dwell time selected for this situation, dwell time DT2 is different than the time DTl used when patient 12 entered posture state PS2.
  • This selected dwell time which is represented by arrow 227, may be based on any of the considerations discussed above.
  • a universal dwell time may be employed for use when any posture transition is detected, as previously mentioned.
  • dwell time DT2 expires at time T4 without patient 12 shifting posture states. Therefore, the therapy level associated with PSl is again delivered to patient 12.
  • This reversion to Therapy Level 1 is shown to occur as a step function 228.
  • any type of linear ramp or decay function may be selected instead, as shown by dashed lines 230.
  • the function selected to respond to a decrease in therapy level may be different than the function selected to respond to an increase in therapy level. That is, if desired, the one of functions 226 that is selected in response to a therapy increase is not required to correspond to the one of functions 230 that is selected in response to a therapy decrease.
  • dwell times may be imposed between the time a shift in posture state is detected and the time a response, which in this case is a therapy level adjustment, is initiated.
  • FIG. 9B is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to another example of the disclosure. This timing diagram, like the one discussed in regards to
  • FIG. 9A depicts delivery of therapy at various therapy levels. These therapy levels are delivered in response to detected posture states.
  • a posture state PSl has already been detected and is being used to deliver therapy for that posture state PSl at Therapy Level 1.
  • a second, different posture state PS2 is detected.
  • a different Therapy Level 2 is associated with this posture state.
  • a dwell time DTl is imposed, as shown by arrow 234.
  • the patient's posture state changes again to a third posture state PS3, which is different from the original posture state PSl. Therefore, the timer associated with DTl is reset, and a timer is started for this third posture state PS3, as indicated by arrow 236.
  • the dwell time associated with this timer, DT2 is different from the dwell time DTl used for PS2, although this need not be the case in other examples.
  • the patient's posture again shifts back to the original posture PSl . Since this occurs prior to expiration of dwell time DT2, as may be seen by arrow 236, the dwell timer that was started upon the patient's classification in posture state PS3 is reset. Once again, no therapy change occurs because the applicable dwell time has not expired. In this case, therapy is still being delivered at Therapy level 1 , which is the therapy level associated with PS 1. No dwell timer needs to be started, since therapy is already being delivered at the level associated with this newly-assumed posture state of PSl.
  • the therapy adjustment may be initiated as a step function. However, in one example, the change will occur over time, as a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function, such as an exponential ramp function.
  • the current example of FIG. 9B shows the change in therapy occurring as a ramp function, with an increase to the target Therapy Level 2 achieved over a therapy adjustment time indicated by arrow 240, which in one example may be programmable.
  • the therapy adjustment in FIG. 9B is depicted as an increase in therapy level for purposes of illustration, the therapy adjustment could be a decrease in therapy level, depending on the difference in therapy level for posture state PSl and posture state PS3.
  • dwell times will be automatically selected based on the newly-assumed postures.
  • dwell time DTl is used for newly-assumed posture state PS2
  • dwell time DT2 is used for newly-assumed posture state PS3.
  • the previously- detected stable posture state could be used for this purpose.
  • a dwell time associated with posture state PSl (rather than new posture state PS2) could be selected for use after the re-classification of patient 12 in posture state PS2 at time Tl .
  • dwell times may be selected in a variety of ways.
  • FIG. 9C is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to yet another example of the disclosure. This diagram describes use of multiple dwell times in response to a single detected posture state change. These dwell times are used to initiate multiple responses.
  • time TO it is assumed that patient 12 has been classified in a stable posture state PSl and a therapy level associated with this posture state, Therapy Level 1, is being used to deliver therapy to patient 12.
  • patient 12 is classified in a second, different posture state PS2. It will be assumed that a different Therapy Level 2 is associated with this posture state. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to Therapy Level 2 in response to re-classification of the patient's posture state, a dwell time DTl is imposed.
  • a timer is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change and that will be used to initiate a change in therapy level.
  • This dwell time DTl is represented by arrow 242.
  • a second timer is started that is associated with a different dwell time DTT that is longer than the dwell time DTl, as indicated by arrow 246.
  • This second time will be used to initiate a response other than the change in therapy level.
  • this other dwell time DTl ' may be used to change the level of some therapy other than that represented by FIG. 9C, to start another therapy, stop another therapy, initiate a notification, prompt storing of data, start a communication session, or initiate some other response.
  • therapy adjustment may be initiated upon expiration of dwell time DTl, but the other response is initiated later, upon expiration of dwell time DTl '.
  • the first dwell timer associated with dwell time DTl expires, as shown by arrow 242. Therefore, the therapy level is changed to Therapy Level 2.
  • This change is not immediate in this example, but rather occurs according to an exponential attack function, as shown by curve 244.
  • patient 12 changes his posture state to PS3.
  • this second dwell timer is reset, and the response associated with this second timer is not initiated. Instead, at least one timer associated with posture state PS3 is started.
  • a first dwell timer is started for a dwell time DTl, as shown by arrow 248.
  • This dwell timer will be associated with a change in therapy to a level that is associated with PS3.
  • a second dwell timer is also started in response to this change to posture state PS3 that will be used to initiate a second response. This second dwell timer will expire after the dwell time DTT, as indicated by arrow 250.
  • the first dwell timer associated with time DTl expires, and therapy levels are therefore adjusted to levels associated with posture state PS3, which in this example will be assumed to be Therapy Level 3.
  • the change does not occur immediately, but occurs using an exponential attack function shown by curve 252.
  • the second dwell timer associated with DTT also expires, resulting in initiation of the second response, which may be any one of a number of responses associated with this shift to posture state 3.
  • the dwell times that are selected are the same for both posture changes. That is, when the posture change to PS2 occurs at time Tl, the dwell time DTl is selected for use in initiating a change in therapy level, and the dwell time DTT is selected for use in initiating a second response. These same two dwell times are also selected for use when the shift to posture state PS3 occurs.
  • this example shows that the dwell times may be response-specific, and not based on the posture states being assumed. Of course, the same dwell time may be used to initiate multiple responses in another example.
  • the selected dwell time may be both response-specific, and also based on posture state information (e.g., most-recent stable posture state, newly-assumed posture state, transition between the two, and so forth.)
  • posture state information e.g., most-recent stable posture state, newly-assumed posture state, transition between the two, and so forth.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C are merely examples, and that many other scenarios may be contemplated for using one or more dwell times to control initiation of therapy adjustments and one or more additional responses as a result of one or more posture state changes.
  • FIG. 10 is an example timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment prior to expiration of the dwell time. At time TO, it will be assumed that a first stable posture state has already been detected and is being used to control therapy delivery at a first therapy level, therapy level TLl, which has been associated with posture state PSl.
  • a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. It will be assumed that a different therapy level, therapy level TL3, has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to therapy level TL3 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed.
  • a timer/counter which may be referred to as a "dwell timer”
  • dwell time DTl is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change.
  • the dwell time may be selected on the particular posture state change that is occurring, on the most-recent stable posture state, on the newly-detected posture state, on a response type, and/or on some other monitored condition.
  • the dwell time DTl may be selected based on the previous stable posture state PSl that was assumed by patient 12 prior to the most recent posture state transition.
  • the dwell time DTl may instead be selected based on the newly-detected posture PS2.
  • the specific transition from PS 1 to PS2 may be used to select the dwell time.
  • Other system conditions such as physiological conditions of patient 12, e.g., heart rate or blood pressure, may be used to select dwell time.
  • dwell time DTl expires at time T3, as indicated by arrow 260.
  • the level of therapy delivery changes from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2.
  • This change may occur in response to a manual therapy adjustment received from a user, e.g., via external programmer 20.
  • the therapy adjustment may be manual in the sense that the adjustment occurs in response to user input rather than based on a therapy level previously associated with the new posture state, PS2.
  • Manual changes may generally encompass any changes based on user input, including input based on manipulation of buttons, touchscreen media, or other media such as voice recognition.
  • the change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 in the example of FIG. 10 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 262.
  • the change may occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function.
  • any type of linear or non- linear ramp or exponential attack function may be used to achieve the target therapy level TL2 in response to a manual therapy adjustment by a user such as patient 12.
  • the type of ramp or attack function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level TL2 occurs may be programmable.
  • the level of therapy delivery is changed from the adjusted therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3, which is associated with PS2. This change may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 224. However, as previously described, other types of transitions are also contemplated.
  • the user-initiated therapy adjustment at T2 may indicate that a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred.
  • a user-initiated therapy adjustment that occurs during dwell time DTl may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with a newly assumed posture state, e.g., posture state PS2 in the example of FIG. 10, at an earlier time.
  • the therapy change received during dwell time DTl may also be examined to determine if a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred.
  • the dwell time may be adjusted automatically by IMD 14 or programmer 20, or by a user such as a clinician.
  • processor 80 of IMD 14 may determine if the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is consistent with a therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2, i.e., the change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL3.
  • processor 80 is primarily described herein for purposes of example, any suitable processor may perform the functions attributed to processor 80.
  • processor 92 of IMD 26 and/or processor 104 of external programmer 20 may perform some or all of the functions attributed to processor 80.
  • the newly-assumed posture state PS2 is associated with a higher therapy level TL3 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl .
  • the therapy level may be automatically increased in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Processor 80 may determine whether the therapy level TL2 associated with the user- initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is also higher than therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl.
  • Processor 80 may also determine whether the therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is closer to the therapy level TL3 associated with the newly- assumed posture state PS2 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1.
  • processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is consistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. In some examples, processor 80 may also compare therapy level TL2 associated with the user- initiated therapy adjustment to therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 to determine how closely the user-initiated therapy level matches the therapy level associated with the new posture state. For example, processor 80 may determine if therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 than therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl.
  • processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is inconsistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may also determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is inconsistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 if therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1 than therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2.
  • processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl does not indicate that a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred. Instead, it may be determined that the therapy adjustment was an anomaly or that the therapy levels TLl and TL3 may not be appropriate for the newly detected posture state.
  • processor 80 may automatically decrease dwell time DTl. For example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to end at time T2 such that the new dwell time DTl corresponds to the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T2 when the user-initiated therapy change occurred. In other examples, processor 80 may use other techniques for decreasing dwell time DTl, e.g., decreasing dwell time DTl by a specified percentage. Again, although processor 80 of IMD 14 is described for purposes of illustration, various aspects of the techniques described in this disclosure may be performed by IMD 14 or programmer 20 alone or in combination with one another.
  • processor 80 may monitor and record user-initiated therapy adjustments each time a dwell time is initiated in response to a posture state transition.
  • FIG. 11 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded during various occurrences of dwell time DTl. As previously described, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In the example of FIG. 11, dwell time DTl may be specific to the particular posture state change that is occurring, i.e., the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Although other techniques for selecting dwell time DTl are also contemplated.
  • FIG. 11 is substantially similar to FIG. 10, but includes additional user-initiated therapy adjustments that occurred during other occurrences of dwell time DTl, i.e., after patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • dwell time DTl is initiated at time Tl in response to patient 12 transitioning from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Dwell time DTl expires at time T3. Since, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11 , patient 12 did not transition from posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl, therapy delivery according to therapy level TL3 associated with posture state PS2 is initiated at time T3.
  • each of therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 corresponding to times T2, T4, T5, and T6, respectively, are higher than therapy level TLl . Therefore, each of these recorded therapy adjustments may be consistent with the automatic therapy increase from therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl to therapy level TL3 associated with posture state PS2 expected when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Each of times T2, T4, T5, and T6 and corresponding therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shorter dwell time DTl .
  • processor 80 may examine how closely the adjusted therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 match therapy level TL3 associated with newly assumed posture state PS3, e.g., whether each of therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 is closer to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl or therapy level TL3 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2, to determine whether each of the recorded therapy adjustments indicates that patient 12 would prefer a shorter dwell time DTl .
  • Processor 80 may determine a new decreased value for dwell time DTl based on times T2, T4, T5, and T6 that user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As one example, processor 80 may average the time between time Tl at the start of the dwell time DTl and each of times T2, T4, T5, and T6 corresponding to the recorded therapy adjustments to determine a new dwell time DTl. As another example, processor 80 may select the first time T2 that patient entered a therapy adjustment, and reduce the length of dwell time DTl based on time T2, e.g., by reducing DTl to be equal to T2-T1. In the example of FIG.
  • posture state PSl is associated with therapy level TLl and posture state PS2 is associated with therapy level TL3 throughout each occurrence of the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • the therapy levels associated with posture states PSl and PS2 may change over time, i.e., new therapy levels may be associated with posture states PSl and PS2.
  • FIG. 12 is a timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment following expiration of a dwell time. At time TO, it will be assumed that a first stable posture state has already been detected and is being used to control therapy delivery at a first therapy level, therapy level TLl, which has been associated with posture state PSl. At time Tl, a second, different posture state PS2 is detected.
  • therapy level TL2 has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to therapy level TL2 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed. In particular, a timer/counter is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change.
  • dwell time DTl expires at time T2, as indicated by arrow 270.
  • the level of therapy delivery automatically changes from therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl to therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, since patient 12 did not transition out of posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl in the example of FIG. 12.
  • This change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 272.
  • the change may occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function.
  • any type of linear or non-linear ramp or exponential decay function may be used to achieve the target therapy level TL2.
  • the type of ramp or decay function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level TL2 occurs may be programmable.
  • the level of therapy delivery changes from therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3.
  • This change may occur in response to a manual therapy adjustment received from a user, e.g., via external programmer 20.
  • the therapy adjustment may be manual in the sense that the adjustment occurs in response to user input rather than automatically based on a therapy level previously associated with the new posture state, PS2.
  • This change from therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 274, although other types of transitions are also contemplated.
  • the user-initiated therapy change at T3 may indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred.
  • a user-initiated therapy change that occurs following dwell time DTl may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with the previous posture state, e.g., posture state PSl, for a longer period of time and transition to the therapy associated with a newly assumed posture state, e.g., posture state PS2, at a later time.
  • the therapy change received following dwell time DTl may also be examined to determine if a longer dwell time DTl is preferred.
  • Processor 80 of IMD 14 may determine if the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is consistent with changing the therapy in the direction of therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl.
  • the previous posture state PSl is associated with a higher therapy level TLl than the therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2. Therefore, a user- initiated increase from therapy level TL2 may indicate that patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the previous posture state PS 1 for longer.
  • Processor 80 may determine whether therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2.
  • Processor 80 may also determine whether the therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is closer to therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl than therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2. If therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following expiration of dwell time DTl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is consistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl.
  • processor 80 may also compare the therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated change in therapy to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl to determine how closely the user-initiated therapy change matches the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1. If therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl was lower than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is inconsistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. As a result, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl does not indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred.
  • Processor 80 may also determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl does not indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred if therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl.
  • processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl .
  • processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to a time longer than the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T3 when a user-initiated therapy adjustment returning the therapy close to or toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl occurred.
  • a second user-initiated therapy change may indicate when patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the newly-detected posture state PS2. For example, patient 12 or another user may adjust the therapy towards therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 at time T4.
  • therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2.
  • a user-initiated therapy adjustment that decreases therapy from a higher therapy level TL3 to a lower therapy level TL4 may be consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Processor 80 may also compare therapy level TL4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment with therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 to determine how closely therapy level TL4 matches therapy level TL2, e.g., whether therapy TL4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2 to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl.
  • Processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl based on time T4 associated with the second therapy adjustment. For example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl equal to the time between time Tl associated with the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment.
  • FIG. 13 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded following various occurrences of dwell time DTl. As previously described, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In the example of FIG. 13, dwell time DTl may be specific to the particular posture state change that is occurring, i.e., the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Although other techniques for selecting dwell time DTl are also contemplated. FIG. 13 is substantially similar to FIG.
  • dwell time DTl is initiated at time Tl in response to patient 12 transitioning from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Dwell time DTl expires at time T2. Since, in the example illustrated in FIG. 13, patient 12 did not transition from posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl, therapy delivery according to therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 is initiated at time T2.
  • each of therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 corresponding to times T3, T5, and T7, respectively, are higher than therapy level TL2. Therefore, each of these recorded therapy adjustments may be consistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl.
  • Each of times T3, T5, and T7 and corresponding therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time DTl .
  • processor 80 may examine how closely the adjusted therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 match therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PS 1 , e.g., whether each of therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 is closer to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl or therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2, to determine whether each of the recorded therapy adjustments indicates that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time DTl .
  • Processor 80 may determine a new increased value for dwell time DTl based on times T3, T5, and T7 that user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As one example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to a time longer than the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T7 when the last, i.e., farthest from time Tl, of the user-initiated therapy adjustments returning the therapy close to or toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl occurred. Additionally, a second user-initiated therapy change may indicate when patient
  • Time T6 may indicate another user-initiated therapy adjustment indicating when patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the newly-detected posture state PS2.
  • the user-initiated therapy adjustment occurring at time T6 decreases therapy from a higher therapy level TL5 to a lower therapy level TL6, which may be consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Processor 80 may also determine how closely therapy level TL6 matches therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2, e.g., whether therapy level TL6 is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 or therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl, to determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment occurring at time T6 is consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • Processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl based on times T4 and T6.
  • processor 80 may average times T4 and T6 to obtain an end time and set dwell time DTl to the time between Tl and the average of times T4 and T6.
  • posture state PSl is associated with therapy level TLl
  • posture state PS2 is associated with therapy level TL2 throughout each occurrence of the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2.
  • the therapy levels associated with posture states PSl and PS2 may change over time, i.e., new therapy levels may be associated with posture states PSl and PS2.
  • FIG. 14 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for updating a dwell time based on one or more user-initiated therapy adjustments. Although the description of FIG. 14 primarily refers to IMD 14 and its components (FIG.
  • the method of FIG. 14 is also applicable to other medical devices, such as IMD 26.
  • the method of FIG. 14, or portions of the method may be performed by an external programmer 20, such as patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
  • Therapy adjustments may be automatic therapy adjustments applied by IMD 14 in response to different detected posture states, and subject to applicable dwell times, or manual therapy adjustments made by a user such as a patient 12 or a clinician.
  • Adjustments to dwell times may be automatic dwell time adjustments applied by IMD 14 or programmer 20 based on analysis of manual therapy adjustments made during or after dwell times.
  • the dwell time adjustments may be semi- automatic.
  • programmer 20 may present a proposed dwell time adjustment to a user for approval, e.g., via a user interface associated with the programmer.
  • the proposed dwell time adjustment that is presented to the user may be generated automatically by IMD 14 or programmer 20.
  • a clinician or other user may adjust dwell times via programmer 20 based on analysis of stored therapy adjustment data indicating patient therapy adjustments relative to applicable posture states and dwell times.
  • IMD 14 or programmer 20 may store therapy adjustment data for use in evaluating dwell time adjustments.
  • the therapy adjustment data may include a variety of data stored by IMD 14 or programmer 20, such as data that indicates the timing of the therapy adjustments relative to dwell time and detected posture states, the parameters that were adjusted, the parameter values selected by the user (e.g., therapy level), or other pertinent therapy adjustment information.
  • IMD 14 or programmer 20 may require analysis of multiple therapy adjustments in order to adjust the dwell time. For example, a single patient therapy adjustment within a dwell time of after dwell time expiration may not trigger a dwell time adjustment.
  • IMD 14 or programmer 20 may automatically adjust a dwell time to be shorter if N or more patient therapy adjustments are detected within the dwell time, where N is a threshold value triggering dwell time adjustment, and the patient therapy adjustments are consistent with adjustment close to or toward therapy settings, e.g., a therapy level, of the newly detected posture state.
  • IMD 14 or programmer 20 may automatically adjust a dwell time to be longer if N or more patient therapy adjustments are detected after expiration of the dwell time, and the patient therapy adjustments are consistent with adjustment close to or toward therapy settings of a previously detected stable posture.
  • the threshold value N may be the same for all or some dwell times, or different for different dwell times associated with different posture states or posture state transitions.
  • the number of patient therapy adjustments may refer to the number of patient therapy adjustments associated with separate posture state transitions.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may be configured such that N patient therapy adjustments during a single posture state transition does not trigger dwell time adjustment. Rather, at least one patient therapy adjustment in N separate instances of the posture state transition, stable posture state or newly detected posture state may be required to impose a dwell time adjustment for that posture state transition, stable posture state or newly detected posture state.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 determines that patient 12 has entered a therapy adjustment in each of four different instances of the same posture state transition, e.g., lying back to lying left, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 proceeds to adjust the dwell time.
  • Requiring a minimum number of therapy adjustments in a minimum number of instances of a posture state transition may have a damping effect on the control loop so that dwell time is not immediately and repeatedly adjusted in response to a single therapy adjustment or a few therapy adjustments for a given posture state.
  • Different or similar threshold values N may be used for different dwell times and posture state transitions.
  • the actual dwell time adjustment made by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may be administered in a variety of different ways. If at least N therapy adjustments are detected during the dwell time or after the dwell time for a minimum number of instances of a particular posture state transition, the dwell time for that posture state transition may be adjusted based on the timing of the therapy adjustments.
  • a dwell time is shortened, it may be shortened to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to the time of the earliest therapy adjustment. Alternatively, the dwell time may be shortened to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to an average time of the multiple therapy adjustments. If a dwell time is lengthened, it may be increased to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to the time of the latest therapy patient adjustment. Alternatively, the dwell time may be increased to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to an average time of the multiple patient therapy adjustments.
  • IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may maintain one or more counters that track the number of patient therapy adjustments for multiple instances of the different posture transitions, and increase or reduce dwell times based on comparison of the counter values to applicable threshold values for pertinent posture state transitions. If the number of patient therapy adjustments during or after dwell time exceeds the threshold number, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 automatically adjusts the dwell time, e.g., as described above. As a further example, in some cases, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may adjust the dwell time in fixed increments, progressively increasing or decreasing the dwell time, as applicable, based on the number of patient therapy adjustments indicated by the counter value, or calculating an amount of increase or decrease as a function of the counter value.
  • posture state module 86 e.g., in conjunction with processor 80, may detect a posture state transition (280). In response to the detected posture state transition, dwell time module 89 may initiate a dwell time (282).
  • Processor 80 may record user-initiated therapy adjustments during and following the dwell time (284). User-initiated therapy adjustments occurring during or following the dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shorter or longer dwell time.
  • Processor 80 may identify whether a user-initiated therapy adjustment occurred during the dwell time (286). If a user-initiated therapy adjustment occurred during the dwell time, processor 80 may determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new posture state that patient 12 recently transitioned into (288). A therapy adjustment close to or toward the therapy associated with the new posture state may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with the new posture state at an earlier time. For example, a therapy adjustment close to or toward a therapy associated with a new posture state may be a therapy adjustment that changes an amplitude level close to or toward an amplitude level of the therapy associated with the new posture state.
  • processor 80 may decrease the dwell time, e.g., the dwell time associated with the specific posture state transition, if the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new posture state (290).
  • FIG 14 illustrates decreasing dwell time (290) in response to a single therapy adjustment during the dwell time for a posture state transition (286), as described above, decreasing dwell time may require patient adjustments in multiple instances of the posture state transition, i.e., a threshold number N of patient adjustments.
  • processor 80 may determine whether a therapy adjustment occurred following the dwell time (292). If a user-initiated therapy adjustment did occur following the dwell time, processor 80 may determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning back close to or toward the therapy associated with the previous posture state that patient 12 recently transitioned from (294). A user-initiated therapy adjustment that transitions therapy delivery back close to or toward the therapy associated with the previous posture state may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time.
  • processor 80 may decrease the dwell time, e.g., the dwell time associated with the specific posture state transition (296).
  • Dwell time module 89 and/or memory 82 may store the updated dwell time value for use in delivery of posture- responsive therapy for subsequent posture state transitions by patient 12.
  • FIGS. 15-19 illustrate examples of the application of a search timer and stability timer to associate patient therapy adjustments with posture states. If a patient therapy adjustment is associated with a posture state, it may be used to evaluate whether a dwell time for the posture state should be adjusted.
  • FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 when patient 12 remains in one posture state.
  • IMD 14 must be able to correctly associate each therapy adjustment with a therapy parameter to the intended posture state of patient 12 when the therapy adjustment was made. For example, patient 12 may make therapy adjustments to customize the therapy either after patient 12 moves to a different posture state or in anticipation of the next posture state. IMD 14 may employ posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 to track therapy adjustments and the current posture state of patient 12. Although IMD 14 may associate therapy adjustments of any therapy parameter to a posture state, some examples of IMD 14 may only allow the association of amplitude changes. In this manner, patient 12 may change different therapy parameters such as pulse width, pulse rate, or electrode configuration, but IMD 14 will not store these therapy adjustments as being associated to any posture state in some examples.
  • Posture search timer 550 has a search period that is a set amount of time that patient 12 has from the time the therapy adjustment is made, when posture search timer 550 starts, to when the final posture state must begin, prior to the expiration of the search period. In other words, in this example, the patient therapy adjustment will not be associated with a posture state entered after the search period has expired.
  • posture stability timer 552 has a stability period that is a set amount of time that patient 12 must remain within the final posture state for the therapy adjustment made to be associated with the final posture state. Posture stability timer 552 restarts at any time that patient 12 changes posture states.
  • the stability timer for the posture state must start before the end of the search period, and the posture state must not change during the stability period. Therefore, the search period and stability period must overlap for the therapy adjustment to be associated with a posture state not currently occupied by patient 12 when the therapy adjustment was made.
  • posture search timer 550 starts at To and runs for a predetermined search period until time T 1 .
  • posture stability timer 552 also starts at time To in the current posture state of patient 12 and runs for the stability period.
  • the stability period is the same as the search period. Since patient 12 has not changed to any different posture states between times To and T 1 , the stability period also ends at Ti.
  • the therapy adjustment made by patient 12 at time To is associated with the posture state sensed between times To and Ti because both the search period and stability period overlap.
  • posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 may not be needed, but their purpose in some example implementations may become clearer in the following examples.
  • the search period of posture search timer 550 may be of any time duration desired by a device manufacturer, and the clinician may or may not be permitted to set the search period to a desired value or within a predetermined search range.
  • the search period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 30 minutes, but it may be set to any time desired, including a time that is outside of that range. More specifically, the search period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 5 minutes, or more preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes in order to provide a reasonable amount of time for patient 12 to be situated in the final desired posture state. In some examples, and as described in the examples of FIGS. 15-19, the search period is approximately 3 minutes. In other cases, shorter search periods may be used, e.g., approximately 1 second to 60 seconds, or approximately 5 seconds to 20 seconds.
  • the stability period of posture stability timer 552 may be of any time duration desired by the manufacturer or clinician, where the clinician may or may not be permitted to set the stability period.
  • the stability period is between approximately 30 seconds and 30 minutes, but it may be set to any time desired, including times outside of that range. More specifically, the stability period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 5 minutes, and more preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes, in order to ensure that patient 12 is situated in the final desired posture state for a reasonable amount of time and that the final posture state is not just some transitional or interim posture state. In some examples, and as described in the examples of FIGS. 15-19, the stability period is approximately 3 minutes. Although the search period and stability period may have the same duration, they may be different in other examples.
  • associating therapy adjustments with intended posture states may allow a processor to review therapy adjustments made by patient 12 while assuming, or transitioning to, each posture state. These adjustments may be used to determine whether to modify a dwell time, e.g., decrease a dwell time for a specified posture state transition.
  • FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 554 and posture stability timer 556 with one change in posture state.
  • patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment for the next posture state that patient 12 does not currently occupy.
  • patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment that the patient may believe is desirable for a given posture in anticipation of transitioning to that posture on an imminent or near-term basis.
  • Posture search timer 554 and posture stability timer 556 start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state occupied at time To.
  • patient 12 changes to a second posture state that is different than the initial posture state occupied at time T 0 . Therefore, posture stability timer 556 restarts at time T 1 , with the change to the new posture state, still within the search duration of posture search timer 554.
  • patient therapy adjustments received during the search period restart the search period.
  • a series of patient therapy adjustments that are entered closely in time are, in effect, clustered together such that intermediate adjustments are not counted for the posture state.
  • the last adjustment in a series of closely spaced (in time) adjustments is associated with the posture state to represent the final adjustment that brought the parameter to a level or value deemed appropriate by the patient 12 for the given posture state.
  • the search period is three minutes, for example, and the patient 12 makes four adjustments in voltage amplitude within three minutes of one another, e.g., 4.6 volts to 4.8 volts, 4.8 volts to 5.0 volts, 5.0 volts to 5.1 volts, 5.1 volts to 5.3 volts, then the final adjustment value of 5.3 volts may be associated with the posture state.
  • the search period is reset. Once the final adjustment is made, however, if there are no further adjustments for another three minutes, and the stability period is satisfied for the detected posture state, then the final adjustment is associated with the posture state. Clustering of a number of patient therapy adjustments can be useful in order to present a series of closely timed adjustments as a single programming intervention event.
  • Time T 2 indicates the end of posture search timer 554. Consequently, the only posture state that processor 80 of IMD 14 will associate with the therapy adjustment is the second posture state as long as the second posture state satisfies the stability period of posture stability timer 556, i.e., the patient occupies the second posture state for the stability period.
  • time T 3 patient 12 is still in the second posture when the stability period ends, and the therapy adjustment is associated then to the second posture state because the stability period overlapped with the search period.
  • patient 12 may make additional therapy adjustments within the search period. If this occurs, any previous therapy adjustments made before the search period or stability period is completed are not associated to any posture state. Therefore, both the search period and stability period must lapse, i.e., expire, in order for a therapy adjustment to be associated with a posture state.
  • IMD 14 may allow therapy adjustments to be associated with posture states as long as the search period has lapsed or no different posture state was sensed during the search period.
  • FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 560 with two changes in posture states. As shown in FIG. 17, patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment but is engaged in an interim posture state before settling into the final posture state. Posture search timer 558 and posture stability timer 560 both start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state engaged at time T 0 .
  • posture stability timer 560 restarts at time T 1 , still within the search duration of posture search timer 558.
  • time T 2 patient 12 changes to a third posture state, and again posture stability timer 560 restarts.
  • Time T3 indicates the end of posture search timer 558, so the only posture state that processor 80 of IMD 14 will associate with the therapy adjustment is the third posture state begun at time T 2 as long as the third posture state satisfies the stability period of posture stability timer 560.
  • FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example search timer 562 and posture stability timer 564 with the last posture state change occurring outside of the posture search timer. As shown in FIG. 18, patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment but is engaged in an interim posture state too long before settling into the final posture state for the therapy adjustment to be associated with any posture state.
  • Posture search timer 562 and posture stability timer 564 both start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state engaged at time To.
  • posture stability timer 564 restarts at time T 1 , still within the search duration of posture search timer 562.
  • the search timer expires at time T 2 , before patient 12 changes to a third posture state at time T 3 , when posture stability timer 564 again restarts.
  • the stability period for the third posture state then expires at time T 4 . Since the third posture state did not start before the search period expired at time T 2 , the search period and stability period do not overlap and the therapy adjustment from time To is not associated to any posture state. In other examples, therapy adjustments may still be associated with the posture state occupied at time To when the search period and last stability period do not overlap.
  • Patient 12 may be engaged in the upright posture state when patient 12 makes the therapy adjustment at time T 0 .
  • the search duration is three minutes and the stability duration is also three minutes.
  • patient 12 transitions to the lying left posture to cause processor 80 of IMD 14 to restart posture stability timer 560. If patient 12 remains within the lying left posture for the full three minutes of the stability duration, then the therapy adjustment would be associated with the lying left posture. However, patient 12 leaves the lying left posture after only two minutes, or at time T 3 , outside of the search duration.
  • the next posture state may be the lying back posture state.
  • IMD 14 may change therapy according to the therapy parameters associated with the lying back posture because IMD 14 is operating in the automatic posture state-responsive mode. No new associations with the therapy adjustment would be made in the example of FIG. 18.
  • FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for associating a received therapy adjustment with a posture state.
  • user interface 106 receives the therapy adjustment from patient 12 (566) and processor 80 of IMD 14 immediately starts the posture search timer (568) and the posture stability timer (570). If the posture state of patient 12 does not change (572), processor 80 checks to determine if the stability period has expired (576). If the stability period has not expired (576), processor 80 continues to sense for a posture state change (572).
  • processor 80 uses the final posture state, i.e., the currently sensed posture state, to select therapy parameters to deliver therapy (582). Processor 80 then associates the therapy adjustment with the final posture state and counts the therapy adjustment for that posture state (584).
  • processor 80 determines if the search period has expired (574). If the search period has not expired (574), then processor 80 restarts the posture stability timer (570). If the search period has expired (574), then processor 80 automatically delivers posture state -responsive therapy to patient 12 according to the current posture state (578). Processor 80 does not associate the patient therapy adjustment with the final posture state because the search period did not overlap with the stability period (580).
  • a posture stability timer may be employed without the use of a posture search timer.
  • the posture stability timer may be started after a therapy adjustment and reset each time patient 12 changes posture states prior to expiration of the posture stability timer.
  • the therapy adjustment may be associated with the posture state that patient 12 is occupying at that time.
  • the therapy adjustment may be associated with the first stable posture state, i.e., the first posture state that remains stable for the duration of the posture stability timer, after the therapy adjustment, regardless of the amount of time that has past since the therapy adjustment.
  • processor 80 may apply only a stability timer without a search timer.
  • patient 12 may make an anticipatory therapy adjustment intended for posture state in anticipation of transitioning to that posture state on an imminent or near-term basis.
  • the therapy adjustment may be associated with the new, intended posture state upon expiration of the posture search and stability timers.
  • the therapy adjustment may be associated with the new, intended posture state if the search period does not expire prior to entering the new, intended posture state and the posture stability requirement is satisfied for the new, intended posture state.
  • anticipatory therapy adjustments may also be used to update dwell time values.
  • a processor can detect a patient therapy adjustment that is associated with a posture state, but is entered and detected before detection of the posture state, and before commencement of the dwell time for the posture state.
  • This type of anticipatory therapy adjustment prior to transitioning to the posture state for which the therapy adjustment is intended and prior to initiating a corresponding dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shortened dwell time.
  • a patient-initiated therapy adjustment in anticipation of transitioning to a posture state may indicate that the patient would prefer to receive the therapy associated with that posture state as soon as possible. Shortening the dwell time associated with the posture state or the specific posture state transition that patient 12 undergoes may allow patient 12 to receive the therapy associated with the new posture state sooner.
  • Processor 80 may decrease the dwell time associated with the new, intended posture state or the specific posture state transition that patient 12 undergoes from a first posture state to the new, intended posture state for subsequent detections of the posture state or posture state transition.
  • processor 80 may monitor the number of anticipatory therapy adjustments associated with a posture and/or posture state transition and decrease the dwell time associated with the posture or posture state transition based on the number of anticipatory therapy adjustments associated with the posture or posture state transition, e.g., over multiple occurrences of the posture state transition.
  • processor 80 may incrementally decrease the dwell time associated with the posture state or posture state transition. For example, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time by a specified amount, e.g., percentage, each time an anticipatory therapy adjustment is associated with the posture state or posture state transition. As another example, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time after a threshold number of anticipatory therapy adjustments are associated with the posture or posture state transition. As yet another example, processor 80 may set the dwell time for the posture or posture state transition to approximately zero, e.g., after one or a threshold number of anticipatory therapy adjustments are associated with the posture or posture state transition.
  • processor 80 may set the dwell time for the posture or posture state transition to approximately zero, e.g., after one or a threshold number of anticipatory therapy adjustments are associated with the posture or posture state transition.
  • processor 80 may also examine whether the anticipatory therapy adjustment received prior to transitioning to the new, intended posture state and initiating a corresponding dwell time is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new, intended posture state, as described in further detail with respect to FIGS. 10-14.
  • the posture search and stability timers described with respect to FIGS. 15-19 may be used to associate therapy adjustments received during and after the dwell time with the appropriate posture state, e.g., in addition to associating anticipatory therapy adjustments received prior to the dwell time with the intended posture state.
  • aspects of the techniques described in this disclosure may be implemented within an IMD, an external programmer, or a combination of both.
  • information may be processed by the IMD, programmer or a dedicated processing device such as a network server.
  • posture state information may be stored in raw form in an IMD and retrieved from the IMD by an external programmer or other external device for evaluation of dwell time adjustments.
  • the IMD may process the posture state information at least partially for retrieval by an external device.
  • An IMD or programmer may be configured to adjust dwell time automatically or semi-automatically.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • processors may generally refer to any of the foregoing logic circuitry, alone or in combination with other logic circuitry, or any other equivalent circuitry.
  • the functionality ascribed to the systems and devices described in this disclosure may be embodied as instructions on a computer- readable medium such as random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), FLASH memory, magnetic media, optical media, or the like.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • FLASH memory magnetic media, optical media, or the like.
  • systems described herein may not be limited to treatment of a human patient.
  • these systems may be implemented in non-human patients, e.g., primates, canines, equines, pigs, and felines. These animals may undergo clinical or research therapies that my benefit from the subject matter of this disclosure.

Abstract

A medical device detects a patient posture state and adjusts therapy based on the detected posture state. A patient posture state may be transient. To avoid adjusting therapy in response to transient posture states, a dwell time may be imposed. Using the dwell time, only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for a minimum length of time will result in therapy adjustment. To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, patient therapy adjustment data may be analyzed. Therapy adjustments made prior to, or during, the initiation of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Other therapy adjustments may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state.

Description

DWELL TIME ADJUSTMENTS FOR POSTURE STATE-RESPONSIVE THERAPY
BACKGROUND A variety of medical devices are used for chronic, e.g., long-term, delivery of therapy to patients suffering from a variety of conditions, such as chronic pain, tremor, Parkinson's disease, epilepsy, urinary or fecal incontinence, sexual dysfunction, obesity, or gastroparesis. As examples, electrical stimulation generators are used for chronic delivery of electrical stimulation therapies such as cardiac pacing, neurostimulation, muscle stimulation, or the like. Pumps or other fluid delivery devices may be used for chronic delivery of therapeutic agents, such as drugs. Typically, such devices provide therapy continuously or periodically according to parameters contained within a program. A program may comprise respective values for each of a plurality of parameters, specified by a clinician. In some cases, the patient may be allowed to activate and/or modify the therapy delivered by the medical device. For example, a patient may be provided with a patient programming device. The patient programming device communicates with a medical device to allow the patient to activate therapy and/or adjust therapy parameters. For example, an implantable medical device (IMD), such as an implantable neurostimulator, may be accompanied by an external patient programmer that permits the patient to activate and deactivate neurostimulation therapy and/or adjust the intensity of the delivered neurostimulation. The patient programmer may communicate with the IMD via wireless telemetry to control the IMD and/or retrieve information from the IMD.
SUMMARY
In general, the disclosure is directed to posture-responsive therapy. An implantable medical device (IMD) detects a posture state of the patient and adjusts therapy according to the detected posture state. A posture state may refer to a patient posture or a combination of patient posture and patient activity. As patient posture state changes, therapy may be adjusted. For example, the therapy may be adjusted to accommodate differences in a patient's response to therapy when the patient occupies different posture states. Upon detection of a change in posture state, the IMD may adjust therapy delivered to the patient. A patient posture state may be transient, i.e., brief or temporary. To avoid adjusting therapy in response to transient posture states, a time delay may be imposed. The time delay, which may be referred to as a dwell time, may be used to prevent therapy adjustments in response to transient posture states. Using a dwell time, only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for a minimum length of time will result in therapy adjustment. In some cases, different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions.
To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed. Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state. In one example, the disclosure provides a method comprising delivering therapy to a patient, detecting a posture state transition of a patient, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition, detecting a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjusting the dwell time based on the patient adjustment. In another example, the disclosure provides a medical device comprising a posture state module that detects a posture state transition of a patient, a therapy module that delivers therapy to a patient, and a processor that, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusts the therapy based on the posture state transition, detects a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjusts the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
In a further example, the disclosure provides a medical system comprising a medical device that detects a posture state transition of a patient, and delivers therapy to a patient upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, an external programmer that receives a patient adjustment of the therapy, and a processor that adjusts the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
In another example, the disclosure provides a computer-readable medium comprising instructions to cause a processor to deliver therapy to a patient, detect a posture state transition of a patient, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition, detect a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjust the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
The details of one or more examples of the disclosure are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the disclosure will be apparent from the description and drawings, and from the claims.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. IA is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system including two implantable stimulation leads.
FIG. IB is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system including three implantable stimulation leads.
FIG. 1 C is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable drug delivery system including a delivery catheter. FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example patient programmer for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example clinician programmer for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an implantable electrical stimulator.
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an implantable drug pump.
FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an external programmer for an implantable medical device. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an example system that includes an external device, such as a server, and one or more computing devices that are coupled to an implantable medical device and external programmer shown in FIGS. IA- 1C via a network.
FIGS. 8A-8C are conceptual illustrations of posture volumes and vectors that may be used to define a posture state of a patient based on signals sensed by a posture state sensor.
FIG. 9 A is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to one aspect of the disclosure. FIG. 9B is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to another aspect of the disclosure.
FIG. 9C is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to yet another aspect of the disclosure. FIG. 10 is an example timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment prior to expiration of the dwell time.
FIG. 11 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded during various occurrences of the dwell time.
FIG. 12 is a timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment following expiration o f a dwell time .
FIG. 13 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded following various occurrences of the dwell time.
FIG. 14 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for updating a dwell time based on one or more user-initiated therapy adjustments. FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer when a patient remains in one posture state.
FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer with one change in posture state.
FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example posture search timer and posture stability timer with two changes in posture states.
FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example search timer and posture stability timer with the last posture state change occurring outside of the posture search timer.
FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for associating a received therapy adjustment with a posture state to evaluate dwell time adjustment.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In some medical devices that deliver electrical stimulation therapy or other therapies, therapeutic efficacy may change as the patient changes posture states. In general, a posture state may refer to a posture or a combination of posture and activity. Efficacy may refer, in general, to a combination of a degree of alleviation of symptoms, alone or in combination with a degree of undesirable side effects. Changes in posture state may cause changes in efficacy due to changes in distances between electrodes or other therapy delivery elements, e.g., due to temporary migration of leads or catheters caused by forces or stresses associated with different postures, or from changes in compression of patient tissue in different posture states. Also, posture state changes may present changes in symptoms or symptom levels, e.g., pain level. For example, for a given patient, sitting may be more painful than standing, or standing may be associated with physical activity that presents more pain.
Changes in efficacy for different posture states may require the patient to continually manage therapy for different posture states by manually adjusting therapy. To maintain therapeutic efficacy, it may be desirable to automatically adjust therapy based on detection of different patient posture states. A medical device may use a posture state module that detects patient posture state. The medical device may adjust therapy in response to different posture states detected by the posture state module. Adjustment of therapy may refer to adjustment of therapy parameters or selection of different therapy programs or groups of programs defining different sets of therapy parameters. Therapy adjustments in response to different posture states may be fully automatic, semi-automatic in the sense that a user may provide approval of proposed changes, or user-directed in the sense that the patient may manually adjust therapy based on a posture state detection. A patient posture state may be transient, i.e., brief or temporary. To avoid adjusting therapy in response to transient posture states, a time delay may be imposed. The time delay, which may be referred to as a dwell time, may be used to prevent therapy adjustments in response to transient posture states. Using a dwell time, only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for a minimum length of time will result in therapy adjustment. In particular, the dwell time may ensure that a posture state is stable before therapy is adjusted, based on the posture state. In some cases, different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions.
After a patient is classified in a posture state, a medical device may be configured to delay therapy adjustment until expiration of the dwell time, indicating a stable posture state. If the posture state changes before the dwell time expires, the medical device does not make a therapy adjustment associated with the detected posture state. If the selected posture state remains unchanged for the duration of the dwell time, indicating a stable posture state, the medical device activates the therapy adjustment associated with the posture state.
Hence, a dwell time may be used to prevent posture states that are only temporarily assumed from affecting therapy or initiating some other action, such as issuance of a notification, establishment of a communication session, or storing of data. Instead, only those posture states that are assumed by a patient for some required length of time will result in the initiation of some action.
To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed. Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state. When manual therapy adjustments occur during the dwell time, a medical device or another device such as a programmer may determine whether the manual therapy adjustments are consistent with therapy adjustments that may automatically occur in response to the posture state transition. When manual therapy adjustment occur following expiration of the dwell time, the medical device or other device may also determine whether the therapy adjustments are consistent with returning close to or toward a therapy delivered prior to the automatic therapy adjustment at the end of the dwell time. The manner in which user-initiated therapy adjustments modify therapy delivery may be used to confirm that a dwell time adjustment is appropriate.
To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, the medical device and/or programmer that communicates with the medical device may record and analyze therapy adjustment data. Therapy adjustments are user-initiated, e.g., patient-initiated, and may be specified manually or by other media such as voice recognition or the like. In each case, therapy adjustment may be entered via a programmer that communicates with the medical device, which may be an IMD. When a patient adjusts therapy following the detection of a posture state but before expiration of the dwell time, the patient may be seeking to more quickly transition to a particular therapy setting upon reaching the posture state. For example, that patient may not want to wait for automated therapy adjustment to be applied upon expiration of the dwell time. Instead, the patient may desire rapid adjustment to ensure adequate coverage of symptoms when the patient assumes the posture state. In this case, the dwell time may be too long and should be shortened. By shortening the length of the dwell time, the medical device may respond more quickly to the detected posture state, providing the therapy adjustment sooner, e.g., so that the patient receives appropriate therapy for more effective coverage of symptoms for the detected posture state.
Alternatively, if the patient adjusts therapy following detection of a posture state and after expiration of the dwell time, and the adjustment tends to return close to or toward the therapy delivered for the previous posture state, it may be determined that the patient is not yet in need of the therapy adjustment for the newly detected posture state. In particular, in some cases, a patient may not begin to feel any adverse effect on efficacy until some period of time after a posture state has stabilized, i.e., until some time after the dwell time. Until that time, the patient may feel more comfortable with the previous therapy parameters delivered for the previous posture state. When the patient begins to feel adverse effects, such as a decrease in pain coverage, the patient may desire to make a therapy adjustment associated with the newly detected posture state. By increasing the length of the dwell time based on analysis of therapy adjustment data, the medical device may apply the therapy adjustment not only after the posture state has stabilized but also at a time that the therapy adjustment will be more appropriate, given the patient's delayed response to the posture state change.
FIG. IA is a schematic diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system 10 including a pair of implantable electrode arrays in the form of stimulation leads 16A and 16B. Although the techniques described in this disclosure may be generally applicable to a variety of medical devices including external and implantable medical devices (IMDs), application of such techniques to IMDs and, more particularly, implantable electrical stimulators such as neurostimulators will be described for purposes of illustration. More particularly, the disclosure will refer to an implantable spinal cord stimulation (SCS) system for purposes of illustration, but without limitation as to other types of medical devices.
As shown in FIG. IA, system 10 includes an IMD 14 and external programmer 20 shown in conjunction with a patient 12. In the example of FIG. IA, IMD 14 is an implantable electrical stimulator configured for SCS, e.g., for relief of chronic pain or other symptoms. Again, although FIG. IA shows an implantable medical device, other examples may include an external stimulator, e.g., with percutaneously implanted leads. Stimulation energy is delivered from IMD 14 to spinal cord 18 of patient 12 via one or more electrodes of implantable leads 16A and 16B (collectively "leads 16"). In some applications, such as SCS to treat chronic pain, the adjacent implantable leads 16 may have longitudinal axes that are substantially parallel to one another.
Although FIG. IA is directed to SCS therapy, system 10 may alternatively be directed to any other condition that may benefit from stimulation therapy. For example, system 10 may be used to treat tremor, Parkinson's disease, epilepsy, urinary or fecal incontinence, sexual dysfunction, obesity, or gastroparesis. In this manner, system 10 may be configured to provide therapy taking the form of deep brain stimulation (DBS), pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, or any other stimulation therapy. In addition, patient 12 is ordinarily a human patient.
Each of leads 16 may include electrodes (not shown in FIG. 1), and the parameters for a program that controls delivery of stimulation therapy by IMD 12 may include information identifying which electrodes have been selected for delivery of stimulation according to a stimulation program, the polarities of the selected electrodes, i.e., the electrode configuration for the program, and voltage or current amplitude, pulse rate, and pulse width of stimulation delivered by the electrodes. Delivery of stimulation pulses will be described for purposes of illustration. However, stimulation may be delivered in other forms such as continuous waveforms. Programs that control delivery of other therapies by IMD 12 may include other parameters, e.g., such as dosage amount, rate, or the like for drug delivery.
In the example of FIG. IA, leads 16 carry one or more electrodes that are placed adjacent to the target tissue of the spinal cord. One or more electrodes may be disposed at a distal tip of a lead 16 and/or at other positions at intermediate points along the lead. Leads 16 may be implanted and coupled to IMD 14. Alternatively, as mentioned above, leads 16 may be implanted and coupled to an external stimulator, e.g., through a percutaneous port. In some cases, an external stimulator may be a trial or screening stimulation that is used on a temporary basis to evaluate potential efficacy to aid in consideration of chronic implantation for a patient. In additional examples, IMD 14 may be a leadless stimulator with one or more arrays of electrodes arranged on a housing of the stimulator rather than leads that extend from the housing. The stimulation may be delivered via selected combinations of electrodes carried by one or both of leads 16. The target tissue may be any tissue affected by electrical stimulation energy, such as electrical stimulation pulses or waveforms. Such tissue includes nerves, smooth muscle, and skeletal muscle. In the example illustrated by FIG. IA, the target tissue is spinal cord 18. Stimulation of spinal cord 18 may, for example, prevent pain signals from traveling through the spinal cord and to the brain of patient 12. Patient 12 may perceive the interruption of pain signals as a reduction in pain and, therefore, efficacious therapy results.
The deployment of electrodes via leads 16 is described for purposes of illustration, but arrays of electrodes may be deployed in different ways. For example, a housing associated with a leadless stimulator may carry one or more arrays of electrodes, e.g., rows and/or columns (or other patterns), to which shifting operations may be applied. Such electrodes may be arranged as surface electrodes, ring electrodes, or protrusions. As a further alternative, electrode arrays may be formed by rows and/or columns of electrodes on one or more paddle leads. In some examples, electrode arrays may include electrode segments, which may be arranged at respective positions around a periphery of a lead, e.g., arranged in the form of one or more segmented rings around a circumference of a cylindrical lead.
In the example of FIG. IA, stimulation energy is delivered by IMD 14 to the spinal cord 18 to reduce the amount of pain perceived by patient 12. As described above, IMD 14 may be used with a variety of different pain therapies, such as peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS), peripheral nerve field stimulation (PNFS), DBS, cortical stimulation (CS), pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, and the like. The electrical stimulation delivered by IMD 14 may take the form of electrical stimulation pulses or continuous stimulation waveforms, and may be characterized by controlled voltage levels or controlled current levels, as well as pulse width and pulse rate in the case of stimulation pulses.
In some examples, IMD 14 delivers stimulation therapy according to one or more programs. A program defines one or more parameters that define an aspect of the therapy delivered by IMD 14 according to that program. For example, a program that controls delivery of stimulation by IMD 14 in the form of pulses may define a voltage or current pulse amplitude, a pulse width, a pulse rate, for stimulation pulses delivered by IMD 14 according to that program. Moreover, therapy may be delivered according to multiple programs, wherein multiple programs are contained within each of a plurality of groups.
Each program group may support an alternative therapy selectable by patient 12, and IMD 14 may deliver therapy according to the multiple programs. IMD 14 may rotate through the multiple programs of the group when delivering stimulation such that numerous conditions of patient 12 are treated. As an illustration, in some cases, stimulation pulses formulated according to parameters defined by different programs may be delivered on a time -interleaved basis. For example, a group may include a program directed to leg pain, a program directed to lower back pain, and a program directed to abdomen pain. In this manner, IMD 14 may treat different symptoms substantially simultaneously.
During use of IMD 14 to treat patient 12, movement of patient 12 among different posture states may affect the ability of IMD 14 to deliver consistent efficacious therapy. For example, leads 16 may migrate toward IMD 14 when patient 12 bends over, resulting in displacement of electrodes and possible disruption in delivery of effective therapy. For example, stimulation energy transferred to target tissue may be reduced due to electrode migration, causing reduced efficacy in terms of relief of symptoms such as pain. As another example, leads 16 may be compressed towards spinal cord 18 when patient 12 lies down. Such compression may cause an increase in the amount of stimulation energy transferred to target tissue. In this case, the amplitude of stimulation therapy may need to be decreased to avoid causing patient 12 additional pain or unusual sensations, which may be considered undesirable side effects that undermine overall efficacy.
Many other examples of reduced efficacy due to increased coupling or decreased coupling of stimulation energy to target tissue may occur due to changes in posture and/or activity level associated with patient posture state. To avoid or reduce possible disruptions in effective therapy due to posture state changes, IMD 14 may include or be associated with a posture state module that detects the posture state of patient 12 and causes the IMD 14 to automatically adjust stimulation according to the detected posture state. For example, a posture state module may include a posture state sensor such as an accelerometer that detects when patient 12 lies down, stands up, or otherwise changes posture. In response to a posture state indication by the posture state module, IMD 14 may make a therapy adjustment. For example, IMD 14 may change program group, program, stimulation amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, and/or one or more other parameters, groups or programs to maintain therapeutic efficacy. When patient 12 lies down, for example, IMD 14 may automatically reduce stimulation amplitude so that patient 12 does not need to reduce stimulation amplitude manually. In some cases, IMD 14 may communicate with external programmer 20 to present a proposed change in stimulation in response to a posture state change, and receive approval or rejection of the change from a user, such as patient 12 or a clinician, before automatically applying the therapy change. Additionally, in response to a posture state change, IMD 14 may communicate with external programmer 20 to provide a notification to a user, such a clinician, that patient 12 has potentially experienced a fall.
A user, such as a clinician or patient 12, may interact with a user interface of external programmer 20 to program IMD 14. Programming of IMD 14 may refer generally to the generation and transfer of commands, programs, or other information to control the operation of IMD 14. For example, external programmer 20 may transmit programs, parameter adjustments, program selections, group selections, or other information to control the operation of IMD 14, e.g., by wireless telemetry. As one example, external programmer 20 may transmit parameter adjustments to support therapy changes due to posture changes by patient 12. As another example, a user may select programs or program groups. Again, a program may be characterized by an electrode combination, electrode polarities, voltage or current amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, and/or duration. A group may be characterized by multiple programs that are delivered simultaneously or on an interleaved or rotating basis. A user interface of external programmer 20 may indicate to the user the posture state in which patient 12 currently resides. This patient posture state may be a static posture that does not take into account activity level, an activity level that does not take into account posture, or some combination of the posture and activity level that describes the physical position and movement of patient 12. As an example, posture may be characterized as one of the following postures: standing, sitting, lying down on back, lying down on front, lying down on left side, lying down on right side. Activity level may be characterized as one of high, medium and low, or be characterized in terms of a numeric scale, e.g., 1-10 or 1-12. In other examples, other gradations, e.g., high, medium high, medium, medium low, and low, or other numerical scales may be used to characterize activity level.
A posture state may indicate a combination of one of the above postures with one of the above activity levels. For some postures, such as lying down postures, the posture state may not need to consider activity level, as the patient may be less likely to undertake any significant activity in such postures. In other cases, all posture states may take into account posture and activity level, even if there is minimal activity in a particular posture. Posture state may be determined based on posture information and/or activity level information generated by a posture state module, which may include one or more accelerometers or other posture or activity level sensors.
A patient posture state may be represented by a posture state indication presented by the user interface of programmer 20 as a visible, audible, or tactile indication. When presented as a visible indication, the posture state indication may be, for example, a graphical representation, a symbolic icon, a textual representation, such as word or number, an arrow, or any other type of indication. The visible indication may be presented via a display, such as an a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or the like. In other cases, the visible indication may be provided in a translucent area that is selectively backlit to indicate a posture. An audible indication may be produced by programmer 20 as spoken words stating a posture state, or different audible tones, different numbers of tones, or other audible information generated by the programmer to indicate posture state. A tactile indication of posture state may be produced by programmer 20, for example, in the form of different numbers of vibratory pulses delivered in sequence or vibratory pulses of different lengths, amplitudes, or frequencies. Programmer 20 may present multiple indications representative of different patient posture states. IMD 14 may communicate a patient posture state according to a posture state parameter value sensed by a posture state module to external programmer 20, e.g., by wireless telemetry. For example, IMD 14 may transmit a posture state indication to programmer 20 on a periodic, intermittent or continuous basis or in response to a posture state change. Alternatively, programmer 20 may request a posture state indication from IMD 14 on a periodic, intermittent or continuous basis. External programmer 20 then may select and present the associated posture state indication. In some cases, external programmer 20 may be characterized as a physician or clinician programmer if it is primarily intended for use by a physician or clinician. In other cases, external programmer 20 may be characterized as a patient programmer if it is primarily intended for use by a patient. A patient programmer is generally accessible to patient 12 and, in many cases, may be a portable device that may accompany patient 12 throughout the patient's daily routine. In general, a physician or clinician programmer may support selection and generation of programs by a clinician for use by stimulator 14, whereas a patient programmer may support adjustment and selection of such programs by a patient during ordinary use. IMD 14 may be constructed with a biocompatible housing, such as titanium or stainless steel, or a polymeric material such as silicone or polyurethane, and surgically implanted at a site in patient 18 near the pelvis. IMD 14 may also be implanted in patient 12 at a location minimally noticeable to patient 12. Alternatively, IMD 14 may be external with percutaneously implanted leads. For SCS, IMD 14 may be located in the lower abdomen, lower back, upper buttocks, or other location to secure IMD 14. Leads 16 may be tunneled from IMD 14 through tissue to reach the target tissue adjacent to spinal cord 18 for stimulation delivery.
At the distal tips of leads 16 are one or more electrodes (not shown) that transfer the electrical stimulation from the lead to the tissue. The electrodes may be electrode pads on a paddle lead, circular (e.g., ring) electrodes surrounding the body of leads 16, conformable electrodes, cuff electrodes, segmented electrodes, or any other type of electrodes capable of forming unipolar, bipolar or multipolar electrode configurations for therapy. In general, ring electrodes arranged at different axial positions at the distal ends of leads 16 will be described for purposes of illustration. FIG. IB is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable stimulation system
22 including three implantable stimulation leads 16A, 16B, 16C (collectively leads 16). System 22 generally conforms to system 10 of FIG. IA, but includes a third lead. Accordingly, IMD 14 may deliver stimulation via combinations of electrodes carried by all three leads 16, or a subset of the three leads. The third lead, e.g., lead 16C, may include a greater number of electrodes than leads 16A and 16B and be positioned between leads 16A and 16B or on one side of either lead 16A or 16B. External programmer 20 may be initially told the number and configuration of leads 16 in order to appropriately program stimulation therapy. For example, leads 16A and 16B could include four electrodes, while lead 16C includes eight or sixteen electrodes, thereby forming a so-called 4-8-4 or 4-16-4 lead configuration. Other lead configurations, such as 8-16-8, 8-4-8, 16-8-16, 16-4-16, are possible. In some cases, electrodes on lead 16C may be smaller in size and/or closer together than the electrodes of leads 16A or 16B. Movement of lead 16C due to changing activities or postures of patient 12 may, in some instances, more severely affect stimulation efficacy than movement of leads 16A or 16B. Patient 12 may further benefit from the ability of IMD 14 to detect posture states and associated changes and automatically adjust stimulation therapy to maintain therapy efficacy in a three lead system 22.
FIG. 1 C is a conceptual diagram illustrating an implantable drug delivery system 24 including one delivery catheter 28 coupled to IMD 26. As shown in the example of FIG. 1C, drug delivery system 24 is substantially similar to systems 10 and 22. However, drug delivery system 24 performs the similar therapy functions via delivery of drug stimulation therapy instead of electrical stimulation therapy. IMD 26 functions as a drug pump in the example of FIG. 1C, and IMD 26 communicates with external programmer 20 to initialize therapy or modify therapy during operation. In addition, IMD 26 may be refillable to allow chronic drug delivery.
Although IMD 26 is shown as coupled to only one catheter 28 positioned along spinal cord 18, additional catheters may also be coupled to IMD 26. Multiple catheters may deliver drugs or other therapeutic agents to the same anatomical location or the same tissue or organ. Alternatively, each catheter may deliver therapy to different tissues within patient 12 for the purpose of treating multiple symptoms or conditions. In some examples, IMD 26 may be an external device which includes a percutaneous catheter that forms catheter 28 or that is coupled to catheter 28, e.g., via a fluid coupler. In other examples, IMD 26 may include both electrical stimulation as described in IMD 14 and drug delivery therapy.
IMD 26 may also operate using parameters that define the method of drug delivery. IMD 26 may include programs, or groups of programs, that define different delivery methods for patient 14. For example, a program that controls delivery of a drug or other therapeutic agent may include a titration rate or information controlling the timing of bolus deliveries. Patient 14 may use external programmer 20 to adjust the programs or groups of programs to regulate the therapy delivery. Similar to IMD 14, IMD 26 may include a posture state module that monitors the posture state of patient 12 and adjusts therapy accordingly. For example, the posture state module may indicate that patient 12 transitions from lying down to standing up. IMD 26 may automatically increase the rate of drug delivered to patient 12 in the standing position if patient 12 has indicated that pain increased when standing. This automated adjustment to therapy based upon posture state may be activated for all or only a portion of the programs used by IMD 26 to deliver therapy.
FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example patient programmer 30 for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device. A patient may use programmer 30 to enter therapy adjustments. For example, using programmer 30 a patient may select programs, select program groups, and/or adjust program parameters such as amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, electrode combination or electrode polarity. Patient programmer 30 is an example of external programmer 20 illustrated in FIGS. IA, IB and 1C and may be used with either IMD 14 or IMD 26. In alternative examples, patient programmer 30 may be used with an external medical device. As shown in FIG. 2, patient programmer 30 provides a user interface (not shown) for a user, such as patient 12, to manage and program stimulation therapy. Patient programmer 30 is protected by housing 32, which encloses circuitry necessary for patient programmer 30 to operate. Patient programmer 30 also includes display 36, power button 38, increase button 52, decrease button 50, sync button 58, stimulation ON button 54, and stimulation OFF button 56. Cover 34 protects display 36 from being damaged during patient programmer 30 use. Patient programmer 30 also includes control pad 40 which allows a user to navigate through items displayed on display 36 in the direction of arrows 42, 44, 46, and 48. In some examples, the buttons and pad 40 may take the form of soft keys (e.g., with functions and contexts indicated on display 36), with functionality that may change, for example, based on current programming operation or user preference. In alternative examples, display 36 may be a touch screen in which patient 12 may interact directly with display 36 without the use of control pad 40 or even increase button 52 and decrease button 50.
Using various buttons, touchscreen media, or other input media, patient 12 may be enter manual therapy adjustments. If posture-response therapy is enabled to automatically adjust therapy based on detected posture state, patient 12 may also have the ability to manually adjust therapy, either completely or to a limited degree. For example, when IMD 14 or 26 adjusts stimulation therapy based on detected posture state, patient 12 also may adjust the therapy, e.g., by adjusting voltage or current amplitude, pulse width or pulse rate, or by selecting different programs or program groups. Patient therapy adjustments may be entered before, after or during the running of dwell time following a posture state detection.
In the illustrated example, patient programmer 30 is a hand held device. Patient programmer 30 may accompany patient 12 throughout a daily routine. In some cases, patient programmer 30 may be used by a clinician when patient 12 visits the clinician in a hospital or clinic. In other examples, patient programmer 30 may be a clinician programmer that remains with the clinician or in the clinic and is used by the clinician and/or patient 12 when patient 12 is in the clinic. In the case of a clinician programmer, small size and portability may be less important. Accordingly, a clinician programmer may be sized larger than a patient programmer, and it may provide a larger screen for more full-featured programming.
Housing 32 may be constructed of a polymer, metal alloy, composite, or combination material suitable to protect and contain components of patient programmer 30. In addition, housing 32 may be partially or completely sealed such that fluids, gases, or other elements may not penetrate the housing and affect components therein. Power button 38 may turn patient programmer 30 ON or OFF as desired by patient 12. Patient 12 may control the illumination level, or backlight level, of display 36 by using control pad 40 to navigate through the user interface and increase or decrease the illumination level with decrease and increase buttons 50 and 52.
In some examples, illumination may be controlled by a knob that rotates clockwise and counter-clockwise to control patient programmer 30 operational status and display 36 illumination. Patient programmer 30 may be prevented from turning OFF during telemetry with IMD 14 or another device to prevent the loss of transmitted data or the stalling of normal operation. Alternatively, patient programmer 30 and IMD 14 may include instructions that handle possible unplanned telemetry interruption, such as battery failure or inadvertent device shutdown.
Display 36 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or similar monochrome or color display capable of providing visible information to patient 12. Display 36 may provide a user interface regarding current stimulation therapy, posture state information, provide a user interface for receiving feedback or medication input from patient 12, display an active group of stimulation programs, and display operational status of patient programmer 30 or IMD 14 or 26. For example, patient programmer 30 may provide a scrollable list of groups, and a scrollable list of programs within each group, via display 36.
Control pad 40 allows patient 12 to navigate through items displayed on display 36. Patient 12 may press control pad 40 on any of arrows 42, 44, 46, and 48 in order to move to another item on display 36 or move to another screen not currently shown on the display. In some examples, pressing the middle of control pad 40 may select any item highlighted in display 36. In other examples, scroll bars, a scroll wheel, individual buttons, or a joystick may perform the complete or partial functions of control pad 40. In alternative examples, control pad 40 may be a touch pad that allows patient 12 to move a cursor within the user interface displayed on display 36 to manage therapy. Decrease button 50 and increase button 52 provide an input mechanism for patient 12. In general, decrease button 50 may decrease the value of a highlighted stimulation parameter, e.g., amplitude, pulse width or pulse rate, every time the decrease button is pressed. In contrast, increase button 52 may increase the value of a highlighted stimulation parameter one step every time the increase button is pressed. While buttons 50 and 52 may be used to control the value of any stimulation parameter, buttons 50 and 52 may also control patient feedback input. When either of buttons 50 and 52 is selected, patient programmer 30 may initialize communication with IMD 14 or 26 to change therapy accordingly.
When depressed by patient 12, stimulation ON button 54 directs programmer 30 to generate a command for communication to IMD 14 that turns on stimulation therapy. Stimulation OFF button 56 turns off stimulation therapy when depressed by patient 12. Sync button 58 forces patient programmer 30 to communicate with IMD 14. When patient 12 enters an automatic posture response screen of the user interface, pressing sync button 58 turns on the automatic posture response to allow IMD 14 to automatically change therapy according to the posture state of patient 12. Pressing sync button 58 again, when the automatic posture response screen is displayed, turns off the automatic posture response. In the example of FIG. 2, patient 12 may use control pad 40 to adjust the volume, contrast, illumination, time, and measurement units of patient programmer 30.
In some examples, buttons 54 and 56 may be configured to perform operational functions related to stimulation therapy or the use of patient programmer 30. For example, buttons 54 and 56 may control the volume of audible sounds produced by programmer 20, wherein button 54 increases the volume and button 56 decreases the volume. Button 58 may be pressed to enter an operational menu that allows patient 12 to configure the user interface of patient programmer 30 to the desires of patient 12. For example, patient 12 may be able to select a language, backlight delay time, display 36 brightness and contrast, or other similar options. In alternative examples, buttons 50 and 52 may control all operational and selection functions, such as those related to audio volume or stimulation therapy.
Patient programmer 30 may take other shapes or sizes not described herein. For example, patient programmer 30 may take the form of a clam-shell shape, similar to some cellular phone designs. When patient programmer 30 is closed, some or all elements of the user interface may be protected within the programmer. When patient programmer 30 is opened, one side of the programmer may contain a display while the other side may contain input mechanisms. In any shape, patient programmer 30 may be capable of performing the requirements described in this disclosure. Alternative examples of patient programmer 30 may include other input mechanisms such as a keypad, microphone, camera lens, or any other media input that allows the user to interact with the user interface provided by patient programmer 30.
In alternative examples, the buttons of patient programmer 30 may perform different functions than the functions provided in FIG. 2 as an example. In addition, other examples of patient programmer 30 may include different button layouts or different numbers of buttons. For example, patient programmer 30 may even include a single touch screen that incorporates all user interface functionality with a limited set of buttons or no other buttons.
FIG. 3 is a conceptual diagram illustrating an example clinician programmer 60 for programming stimulation therapy delivered by an implantable medical device.
Clinician programmer 60 is an example of external programmer 20 illustrated in FIGS. IA, IB and 1C and may be used with either IMD 14 or IMD 26. In alternative examples, clinician programmer 60 may be used with an external medical device. Using programmer 60, a user may make any of a variety of therapy adjustments. As shown in FIG. 3, clinician programmer 60 provides a user interface (not shown) for a user, such as a clinician, physician, technician, or nurse, to manage and program stimulation therapy. Clinician programmer 60 is protected by housing 62, which encloses circuitry necessary for clinician programmer 60 to operate.
Clinician programmer 60 includes display 64 and power button 66. In the example of FIG. 3, display 64 is a touch screen that accepts user input via touching certain areas within display 64. The user may use stylus 68 to touch display 64 and select virtual buttons, sliders, keypads, dials, or other such representations presented by the user interface shown by display 64. In some examples, the user may be able to touch display 64 with a finger, pen, or any other pointing device. In alternative examples, clinician programmer 60 may include one or more buttons, keypads, control pads, touch pads, or other devices that accept user input, similar to patient programmer 30. In the illustrated example, clinician programmer 60 is a hand held device.
Clinician programmer 60 may be used within the clinic or on in-house patient calls. Clinician programmer 60 may be used to communicate with multiple IMDs 14 and 26 within different patients. In this manner, clinician programmer 60 may be capable of communicating with many different devices and retain patient data separate for other patient data. In some examples, clinician programmer 60 may be a larger device that may be less portable, such as a notebook computer, workstation, or even a remote computer that communicates with IMD 14 or 26 via a remote telemetry device.
In some implementations, most, if not all, of clinician programmer 60 functions may be completed via the touch screen of display 64. The user may program stimulation therapy, modify programs or groups, retrieve stored therapy data, retrieve posture state information, define posture states and other activity information, change the contrast and backlighting of display 64, or any other therapy related function. In addition, clinician programmer 60 may be capable of communicating with a networked server in order to send or receive an email or other message, retrieve programming instructions, access a help guide, send an error message, or perform any other function that may be beneficial to prompt therapy.
Housing 62 may be constructed of a polymer, metal alloy, composite, or combination material suitable to protect and contain components of clinician programmer 60. In addition, housing 62 may be partially or completely sealed such that fluids, gases, or other elements may not penetrate the housing and affect components therein. Power button 66 may turn clinician programmer 60 ON or OFF as desired by the user. Clinician programmer 60 may require a password, biometric input, or other security measure to be entered and accepted before the user can use clinician programmer 60.
Clinician programmer 60 may take other shapes or sizes not described herein. For example, clinician programmer 60 may take the form of a clam-shell shape, similar to some cellular phone designs. When clinician programmer 60 is closed, at least a portion of display 64 is protected within housing 62. When clinician programmer 60 is opened, one side of the programmer may contain a display while the other side may contain input mechanisms. In any shape, clinician programmer 60 may be capable of performing the requirements described herein.
FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an IMD 14. In the example of FIG. 4, IMD 14 includes a processor 80, memory 82, stimulation generator 84, posture state module 86, telemetry module 88, dwell time module 89, and power source 90. Memory 82 may store instructions for execution by processor 80, stimulation therapy data, posture state information, posture state indications, and any other information regarding therapy or patient 12. Therapy information may be recorded for long-term storage and retrieval by a user, and the therapy information may include any data created by or stored in IMD 14. Memory 82 may include separate memories for storing instructions, posture state information, program histories, and any other data that may benefit from separate physical memory modules.
In some examples, IMD 14 may send raw posture state data or posture state detections to an external programmer, such as programmer 30 or 60, and the programmer may apply a dwell time and then send instructions to IMD 14 to adjust therapy. In the example of FIG. 4, however, posture state detection and dwell time analysis are performed within IMD 14, which adjusts therapy according to therapy associated with a particular posture state after that posture state is detected and the dwell time has expired. Again, therapy adjustment may include adjustment of one or more therapy parameters such as amplitude, pulse width, pulse rate, or electrode combination or polarity, or selection of different programs or program groups. IMD 14 may be configured to analyze manual therapy adjustments with respect to the dwell time, and automatically adjust dwell time length based on the analysis. Alternatively, IMD 14 may send manual therapy adjustment and timing information to an external programmer 30 or 60 for analysis and adjustment of the dwell time used by IMD 14.
Processor 80 controls stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation via electrode combinations formed by electrodes in one or more electrode arrays. For example, stimulation generator 84 may deliver electrical stimulation therapy via electrodes on one or more leads 16, e.g., as stimulation pulses or continuous waveforms. Components described as processors within IMD 14, external programmer 20 or any other device described in this disclosure may each comprise one or more processors, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic circuitry, or the like, either alone or in any suitable combination.
Stimulation generator 84 may include stimulation generation circuitry to generate stimulation pulses or waveforms and switching circuitry to switch the stimulation across different electrode combinations, e.g., in response to control by processor 80. In particular, processor 80 may control the switching circuitry on a selective basis to cause stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation to selected electrode combinations and to shift the electrical stimulation to different electrode combinations in a first direction or a second direction when the therapy must be delivered to a different location within patient 12. In other examples, stimulation generator 84 may include multiple current or voltage sources to drive more than one electrode combination at one time. In this case, stimulation generator 84 may decrease a stimulation amplitude (e.g., a current or voltage amplitude) to the first electrode combination and simultaneously increase a stimulation amplitude to the second electrode combination to shift the stimulation therapy.
An electrode combination may be represented by a data stored in a memory location, e.g., in memory 82, of IMD 14. Processor 80 may access the memory location to determine the electrode combination and control stimulation generator 84 to deliver electrical stimulation via the indicated electrode combination. To change electrode combinations, amplitudes, pulse rates, or pulse widths, processor 80 may direct stimulation generator 84 to make the appropriate changes to therapy according to instructions within memory 82 and rewrite the memory location to indicate the changed therapy. In other examples, rather than rewriting a single memory location, processor
80 may make use of two or more memory locations.
When activating stimulation, processor 80 may access not only the memory location specifying the electrode combination but also other memory locations specifying various stimulation parameters such as voltage or current amplitude, pulse width and pulse rate. Stimulation generator 84, e.g., under control of processor 80, then makes use of the electrode combination and parameters in formulating and delivering the electrical stimulation to patient 12. Processor 80 also may control telemetry module
88 to send and receive information to and from external programmer 20. For example, telemetry module 88 may send information to and receive information from patient programmer 30. An example range of electrical stimulation parameters likely to be effective in treating chronic pain, e.g., when applied to spinal cord 18, are listed below.
While stimulation pulses are described, stimulation signals may be of any of a variety of forms such as sine waves or the like.
1. Pulse Rate: between approximately 0.5 Hz and 1200 Hz, more preferably between approximately 5 Hz and 250 Hz, and still more preferably between approximately 30 Hz and 130 Hz.
2. Amplitude: between approximately 0.1 volts and 50 volts, more preferably between approximately 0.5 volts and 20 volts, and still more preferably between approximately 1 volt and 10 volts. In other examples, a current amplitude may be defined as the biological load in the voltage that is delivered. For example, the range of current amplitude may be between 0.1 milliamps (mA) and 50 niA.
3. Pulse Width: between about 10 microseconds and 5000 microseconds, more preferably between approximately 100 microseconds and 1000 microseconds, and still more preferably between approximately 180 microseconds and 450 microseconds.
In other applications, different ranges of parameter values may be used. For deep brain stimulation (DBS), as one example, alleviation or reduction of symptoms associated with Parkinson's disease, essential tremor, epilepsy or other disorders may make use of stimulation having a pulse rate in the range of approximately .5 to 1200 Hz, more preferably 5 to 250 Hz, and still more preferably 30 to 185 Hz, and a pulse width in the range of approximately 10 microseconds and 5000 microseconds, more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 1000 microseconds, still more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 450 microseconds, and even more preferably between approximately 60 microseconds and 150 microseconds. Amplitude ranges such as those described above with reference to SCS, or other amplitude ranges, may be used for different DBS applications. Processor 80 stores stimulation parameters in memory 82, e.g., as programs and groups of programs. Upon selection of a particular program group, processor 80 may control stimulation generator 84 to deliver stimulation according to the programs in the groups, e.g., simultaneously or on a time-interleaved basis. A group may include a single program or multiple programs. As mentioned previously, each program may specify a set of stimulation parameters, such as amplitude, pulse width and pulse rate.
In addition, each program may specify a particular electrode combination for delivery of stimulation. Again, the electrode combination may specify particular electrodes in a single array or multiple arrays, e.g., on a single lead or among multiple leads.
Posture state module 86 allows IMD 14 to sense the posture state of patient 12, e.g., posture, activity or any other static position or motion of patient 12. In the example of FIG. 4, posture state module 86 may include one or more accelerometers, such as three-axis accelerometers, capable of detecting static orientation or vectors in three- dimensions. For example, posture state module 86 may include one or more micro- electro-mechanical accelerometers. In other examples, posture state module 86 may alternatively or additionally include one or more gyroscopes, pressure transducers or other sensors to sense the posture state of patient 12. Posture state information generated by posture state module 86 and processor 80 may correspond to an activity and/or posture undertaken by patient 12 or a gross level of physical activity, e.g., activity counts based on footfalls or the like. In some examples, processor 80 processes the analog output of the posture state sensor in posture state module 86 to determine activity and/or posture data. For example, processor 80 or a processor of posture state module 86 may process the raw signals provided by the posture state sensor to determine activity counts. In some examples, processor 80 may process the signals provided by the posture state sensor to determine velocity of motion information along each axis.
In one example, each of the x, y, and z signals provided by the posture state sensor has both a DC component and an AC component. The DC components may describe the gravitational force exerted upon the sensor and may thereby be used to determine orientation of the sensor within the gravitational field of the earth. Assuming the orientation of the sensor is relatively fixed with respect to patient 12, the DC components of the x, y and z signals may be utilized to determine the patient's orientation within the gravitational field, and hence to determine the posture of patient 12.
The AC component of the x, y and z signals may yield information about patient motion. In particular, the AC component of a signal may be used to derive a value for an activity describing the patient's motion. This activity may involve a level, direction of motion, or acceleration of patient 12. One method for determining the activity is an activity count. An activity count may be used to indicate the activity or activity level of patient 12. For example, a signal processor may sum the magnitudes of the AC portion of an accelerometer signal for "N" consecutive samples. For instance, assuming sampling occurs as 25 Hz, "N" may be set to 25, so that count logic provides the sum of the samples that are obtained in one second. This sum may be referred to as an "activity count."
The number "N" of consecutive samples may be selected by processor 80 or a processor of posture state module 86 based on the current posture state, if desired. The activity count may be the activity portion of the posture state parameter value that may be added to the posture portion. The resulting posture state parameter value may then incorporate both activity and posture to generate an accurate indication of the motion of patient 12.
As another example, the activity portion of the posture state parameter value may describe a direction of motion. This activity parameter may be associated with a vector and an associated tolerance, which may be a distance from the vector. Another example of an activity parameter relates to acceleration. A value quantifying a level of change of motion over time in a particular direction may be associated with the activity portion of a posture state parameter value. Posture state information from posture state module 86 may be stored in memory 82 for later review by a clinician, used to adjust therapy, present a posture state indication to patient 12, or some combination thereof. As an example, processor 80 may record the posture state parameter value, or output, of the 3 -axis accelerometer and assign the posture state parameter value to a certain predefined posture indicated by the posture state parameter value. In this manner, IMD 14 may be able to track how often patient 12 remains within a certain posture.
IMD 14 may also store which group or program was being used to deliver therapy when patient 12 was in the sensed posture. Further, processor 80 may also adjust therapy for a new posture when posture state module 86 indicates that patient 12 has in fact changed postures. Therefore, IMD 14 may be configured to provide posture responsive stimulation therapy to patient 12. Stimulation adjustments in response to posture state may be automatic or semi-automatic (subject to patient approval). In many cases, fully automatic adjustments may be desirable so that IMD 14 may react more quickly to posture state changes.
A posture state parameter value from posture state module 86 that indicates the posture state may constantly vary throughout the day of patient 12. However, a certain activity (e.g., walking, running, or biking) or a posture (e.g., standing, sitting, or lying down) may include multiple posture state parameter values from posture state module 86. Memory 82 may include definitions for each posture state of patient 12. In one example, the definitions of each posture state may be illustrated as a cone in three- dimensional space. Whenever the posture state parameter value, e.g., a vector, from the three-axis accelerometer of posture state module 86 resides within a predefined posture volume, such as a cone, or is close to a reference posture vector, processor 80 indicates that patient 12 is in the posture state corresponding to the posture volume or the reference posture vector. A cone is described for purposes of example. Other definitions of posture states may be illustrated as other shapes, e.g., donuts or toroids, in three-dimensional space. In other examples, posture state parameter value from the 3- axis accelerometer may be compared to a look-up table value or equation to determine the posture state in which patient 12 currently resides.
Posture responsive stimulation may allow IMD 14 to implement a certain level of automation in therapy adjustments. Automatically adjusting stimulation may free patient 12 from the constant task of manually adjusting therapy each time patient 12 changes posture or starts and stops a certain posture state. Such manual adjustment of stimulation parameters can be tedious, requiring patient 12 to, for example, depress one or more keys of patient programmer 30 multiple times during the patient posture state to maintain adequate symptom control. In some examples, patient 12 may eventually be able to enjoy posture state responsive stimulation therapy without the need to continue making changes for different postures via patient programmer 30. Instead, patient 12 may transition immediately or over time to fully automatic adjustments based on posture state.
Although posture state module 86 is described as containing a 3-axis accelerometer, posture state module 86 may contain multiple single-axis accelerometers, dual-axis accelerometers, 3-axis accelerometers, or some combination thereof. In some examples, an accelerometer or other sensor may be located within or on IMD 14, on one of leads 16 (e.g., at the distal tip or at an intermediate position), an additional sensor lead positioned somewhere within patient 12, within an independent implantable sensor, or even worn on patient 12. For example, one or more microsensors may be implanted within patient 12 to communicate posture state information wirelessly to IMD 14. In this manner, the posture state of patient 12 may be determined from multiple posture state sensors placed at various locations on or within the body of patient 12.
In other examples, posture state module 86 may additionally or alternatively be configured to sense one or more physiological parameters of patient 12. For example, physiological parameters may include heart rate, electromyography (EMG), an electroencephalogram (EEG), an electrocardiogram (ECG), temperature, respiration rate, or pH. These physiological parameters may be used by processor 80, in some examples, to confirm or reject changes in sensed posture state that may result from vibration, patient travel (e.g., in an aircraft, car or train), or some other false positive of posture state.
Dwell time module 89 may be used to ensure that once posture state module 86 classifies patient 12 in a posture state, patient 12 does not exit that posture state for a predetermined dwell time, e.g., a delay time imposed between the time posture state module 86 detects a new posture state of patient 12 and the time processor 80 controls stimulation generator 84 to initiate a therapy adjustment in response to this detected posture state. If patient 12 does exit the posture state before the dwell time elapses, no actions are taken in response to classification of patient 12 in this posture state. In one example, only after this dwell time has elapsed will any actions such as therapy adjustments or notifications be taken in response to the classification. In this manner, dwell times are utilized to ensure that transitory posture states that patient 12 may occupy for only a short period of time will not prompt actions such as an unwanted change in therapy.
Moreover, the use of dwell times prevents a patient who is occupying a posture state that is at a boundary between two posture state definitions from triggering multiple actions (e.g., multiple therapy modifications) as patient 12 transitions between the two posture states over a short period of time. By selection of appropriate dwell times, an action in response to such short-term and repeated posture state re-classifications will be suppressed. An action (e.g., therapy change) will only be initiated after patient 12 finally settles in a stable manner into one or the other of the two posture states. This use of a dwell time introduces stability into the system, such that temporarily assumed, transient posture states do not result in the initiation of therapy changes or other posture state -responsive actions.
In one example, dwell time module 89 accesses current posture state information from posture state module 86. Dwell time module 89 may also store an indication of the posture state that patient 12 was most-recently classified in a stable manner, e.g., the posture state that most-recently fulfilled the dwell time requirement. Dwell time module 89 compares this most recent stable posture state to the posture state detected by posture state module 86. If a mismatch occurs, indicating a change in posture state, a potential re-classification of the patient's posture state may be underway. According to one example of the current disclosure, before a response is initiated because of the posture state re-classification, a corresponding dwell time T is measured, as by a timer provided by dwell time module 89.
The posture state detected by posture state module 86 must remain stable throughout this dwell time T such that no other posture state re-classification by posture state module 86 occurs. If this stability is maintained, dwell time module 89 provides an indication to processor 80 that posture state reclassification occurred, and the processor proceeds to initiate the appropriate one or more responses for the detected posture state, such as adjustment of therapy voltage or current amplitude to an amplitude appropriate for the posture state. The appropriate responses may involve modification, cessation, or initiation of therapy delivery, storing of data, notification generation, an initiation or change in a communication session, and/or other responses involving system 10 or 22 (FIGS. IA and IB, respectively). On the other hand, if the dwell time does not expire before the posture state detected by posture state module 86 again changes, the dwell time is reset when posture state module 86 detects the change in posture state. The process may then be repeated if the newly detected posture state is different from the most-recently classified stable posture state.
The dwell time that is used by dwell time module 89 may be programmable. This value may be programmed by a clinician, for instance, when IMD 14 is being initialized, and may be re-programmed any time thereafter as desired by the clinician. In addition, different dwell times may be used for different posture state transitions. In one example, a dwell time may be automatically selected by processor 80 based on current system conditions. For example, the dwell time may be based, in full or in part, on the most-recently classified stable posture state. As another example, a newly- detected posture state may be used to select the dwell time. As a further example, the dwell time may be selected based on the transition from the patient's most-recent stable posture state to the newly-detected posture state.
Hence, different dwell times may be selected based on stable posture state, newly detected posture state, or a combination of the stable posture state and the detected posture state, e.g., based on the particular posture state transition running from the stable posture state to the detected posture state. If there are N different posture state transitions possible among M different posture states, then there may be N different dwell times used by dwell time module 89. In some examples, some posture state transitions may have the same dwell times while other posture state transitions may have different dwell times. As an illustration, if the set of possible posture states includes upright and active, upright and inactive, lying front, lying back, lying right, and lying left, then dwell time module 89 may apply different dwell times for transitions from upright and active to upright and inactive, upright and inactive to upright and active, upright and active to lying front, upright and inactive to lying back, upright and active to lying back, upright and inactive to lying back, lying back to lying front, lying right to lying left, lying left to lying back, and so forth.
In each case, a different dwell time may be selected based on the stable posture state and the newly detected posture state. As one example, if the patient's most- recently classified stable posture state is an upright posture state and the newly detected posture state is lying back, dwell time module 89 uses the dwell time for that transition. If the lying back posture state remains stable for the prescribed dwell time, then processor 80 may control stimulation generator 84 to adjust therapy from the therapy delivered for the upright posture state to the therapy delivered for the lying back posture state. The particular therapy adjustments may be programmed into memory 82, e.g., based on automated programming of therapy parameters and/or clinician-directed programming of therapy parameters for particular posture states. The dwell times may be stored in memory 82, e.g., in a lookup table, or other data structure.
In one example, the dwell time that is imposed by dwell time module 89 may be response-specific. In particular, different dwell times may be used for different actions taken by IMD 14. For example, once a re-classification of posture state occurs, a first dwell time may be imposed before processor 80 initiates a first response (e.g., an adjustment in therapy delivery). A second dwell time that is different from the first dwell time may be imposed before processor 80 initiates a second response (e.g., an event notification) and so on. If multiple dwell times are used, it is possible for the posture state classification to remain stable long enough to prompt a first action associated with a first dwell time. However, the posture state classification may change before a second, longer dwell time elapses. Therefore, the second action associated with this posture state classification is never initiated, since posture state stability was not achieved for the second, longer dwell time.
As may be appreciated, many examples are possible, including an approach that includes a single programmable dwell time for all posture states or posture state transitions, different programmable dwell times for different posture states or posture state transitions, or multiple dwell times for different posture state-responsive actions such as therapy adjustments and notifications. In other examples, dwell times may be automatically selected based on monitored system conditions. In a more flexible system, different dwell times may be selected for different types of responses. According to this latter technique, the multiple dwell times may be programmable, automatically selected based on system conditions or some combination thereof. Wireless telemetry between IMD 14 and external programmer 20, e.g., patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60, or another device may be accomplished by radio frequency (RF) communication or proximal inductive interaction of IMD 14 with external programmer 20. Telemetry module 88 may send information to and receive information from external programmer 20 on a continuous basis, at periodic intervals, at non-periodic intervals, or upon request from the stimulator or programmer. To support RF communication, telemetry module 88 may include appropriate electronic components, such as amplifiers, filters, mixers, encoders, decoders, and the like. Power source 90 delivers operating power to the components of IMD 14. Power source 90 may include a small rechargeable or non-rechargeable battery and a power generation circuit to produce the operating power. Recharging may be accomplished through proximal inductive interaction between an external charger and an inductive charging coil within IMD 14. As one example, external programmer 20 may include the charger to recharge power source 90 of IMD 14. Hence, the programmer and charger may be integrated in the same device. Alternatively, in some cases, a charger unit may serve as an intermediate device that communicates with both the IMD and the programmer. In some examples, power requirements may be small enough to allow IMD 14 to utilize patient motion and implement a kinetic energy-scavenging device to trickle charge a rechargeable battery. In other examples, traditional batteries may be used for a limited period of time. As a further alternative, an external inductive power supply could transcutaneously power IMD 14 when needed or desired.
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an IMD 26 that is a drug pump. IMD 26 is a drug pump that operates substantially similar to IMD 14 of FIG. 4. IMD 26 includes processor 92, memory 94, pump module 96, posture state module 98, dwell time module 99, telemetry module 100, and power source 102. Dwell time module 99 may be substantially similar to dwell time module 89 (FIG. 4) of IMD 14. Instead of stimulation generator 84 of IMD 14, IMD 26 includes pump module 96 for delivering drugs or some other therapeutic agent via catheter 28. Pump module 96 may include a reservoir to hold the drug and a pump mechanism to force drug out of catheter 28 and into patient 12.
Processor 92 may control pump module 96 according to therapy instructions stored within memory 94. For example, memory 94 may contain the programs or groups of programs that define the drug delivery therapy for patient 12. A program may indicate the bolus size or flow rate of the drug, and processor 92 may accordingly deliver therapy. Processor 92 may also use posture state information from posture state module 98 to adjust drug delivery therapy when patient 12 changes posture states, e.g., adjusts his (or her) posture. FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram illustrating various components of an external programmer 20 for IMD 14 or 26. As shown in FIG. 6, external programmer 20 includes processor 104, memory 108, telemetry module 110, user interface 106, and power source 112. External programmer 20 may be embodied as patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60. A clinician or patient 12 interacts with user interface 106 in order to manually change the stimulation parameters of a program, change programs within a group, turn posture responsive therapy ON or OFF, view therapy information, view posture state information, or otherwise communicate with IMD 14 or 26.
User interface 106 may include a screen and one or more input buttons, as in the example of patient programmer 30, that allow external programmer 20 to receive input from a user. Alternatively, user interface 106 may additionally or only utilize a touch screen display, as in the example of clinician programmer 60. The screen may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), dot matrix display, organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, touch screen, or any other device capable of delivering and/or accepting information. For visible posture state indications, a display screen may suffice. For audible and/or tactile posture state indications, programmer 20 may further include one or more audio speakers, voice synthesizer chips, piezoelectric buzzers, or the like. Input buttons for user interface 106 may include a touch pad, increase and decrease buttons, emergency shut off button, and other buttons needed to control the stimulation therapy, as described above with regard to patient programmer 30.
Processor 104 controls user interface 106, retrieves data from memory 108 and stores data within memory 108. Processor 104 also controls the transmission of data through telemetry module 110 to IMD 14 or 26. Memory 108 includes operation instructions for processor 104 and data related to patient 12 therapy. Telemetry module 110 allows the transfer of data to and from IMD 14, or IMD
26. Telemetry module 110 may communicate automatically with IMD 14 at a scheduled time or when the telemetry module detects the proximity of the stimulator. Alternatively, telemetry module 110 may communicate with IMD 14 when signaled by a user through user interface 106. To support RF communication, telemetry module 110 may include appropriate electronic components, such as amplifiers, filters, mixers, encoders, decoders, and the like. Power source 112 may be a rechargeable battery, such as a lithium ion or nickel metal hydride battery. Other rechargeable or conventional batteries may also be used. In some cases, external programmer 20 may be used when coupled to an alternating current (AC) outlet, i.e., AC line power, either directly or via an AC/DC adapter.
Dwell time analysis, posture state detection, therapy adjustment, dwell time adjustment and other functions may be performed in IMD 14 or in programmer 20 or a combination of both in various example implementations. Also, in some instances, as illustrated by FIG. 7 below, such operations could be performed by one or more remote devices. Using telemetry, IMD 14 and programmer 20 may exchange information such that various operations may be performed in IMD 14 or programmer 20 or distributed between the two devices. For purposes of illustrations, application of dwell time analysis and adjustment will be described with respect to IMD 14, without limitation as to performance of some or all of such processes within programmer 20 or another device. External programmer 20 may be either patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an example system 120 that includes an external device, such as a server 122, and one or more computing devices 124A-124N, that are coupled to IMD 14 and external programmer 20 shown in FIGS. IA- 1C via a network 126. In this example, IMD 14 may use its telemetry module 88 to communicate with external programmer 20 via a first wireless connection, and to communicate with an access point 128 via a second wireless connection. In other examples, IMD 26 may also be used in place of IMD 14, and external programmer 20 may be either patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60.
In the example of FIG. 7, access point 128, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N are interconnected, and able to communicate with each other, through network 126. In some cases, one or more of access point 128, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N may be coupled to network 126 through one or more wireless connections. IMD 14, external programmer 20, server 122, and computing devices 124A-124N may each comprise one or more processors, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic circuitry, or the like, that may perform various functions and operations, such as those described in this disclosure.
Access point 128 may comprise a device, such as a home monitoring device, that connects to network 126 via any of a variety of connections, such as telephone dial-up, digital subscriber line (DSL), or cable modem connections. In other examples, access point 128 may be coupled to network 126 through different forms of connections, including wired or wireless connections.
During operation, IMD 14 may collect and store various forms of data. For example, IMD 14 may collect sensed posture state information during therapy delivery that indicate how patient 12 moves throughout each day. In some cases, IMD 14 may directly analyze the collected data to evaluate the posture state of patient 12, such as what percentage of time patient 12 was in each identified posture state. In other cases, however, IMD 14 may send stored data relating to posture state information to external programmer 20 and/or server 122, either wirelessly or via access point 128 and network 126, for remote processing and analysis. For example, IMD 14 may sense, process, trend and evaluate the sensed posture state information. Alternatively, processing, trending and evaluation functions may be distributed to other devices such as external programmer 20 or server 122, which are coupled to network 126. In addition, posture state information may be archived by any of such devices, e.g., for later retrieval and analysis by a clinician.
In some cases, IMD 14, external programmer 20 or server 122 may process posture state information or raw data and/or therapy information into a displayable posture state report, which may be displayed via external programmer 20 or one of computing devices 124A-124N. The posture state report may contain trend data for evaluation by a clinician, e.g., by visual inspection of graphic data. In some cases, the posture state report may include the number of activities patient 12 conducted, a percentage of time patient 12 was in each posture state, the average time patient 12 was continuously within a posture state, what group or program was being used to deliver therapy during each activity, the number of adjustments to therapy during each respective posture state, or any other information relevant to patient 12 therapy, based on analysis and evaluation performed automatically by IMD 14, external programmer 20 or server 122. A clinician or other trained professional may review and/or annotate the posture state report, and possibly identify any problems or issues with the therapy that should be addressed.
In some cases, server 122 may be configured to provide a secure storage site for archival of posture state information that has been collected from IMD 14 and/or external programmer 20. Network 126 may comprise a local area network, wide area network, or global network, such as the Internet. In some cases, external programmer 20 or server 122 may assemble posture state information in web pages or other documents for viewing by trained professionals, such as clinicians, via viewing terminals associated with computing devices 124A-124N. System 120 may be implemented, in some aspects, with general network technology and functionality similar to that provided by the Medtronic CareLink® Network developed by Medtronic, Inc., of Minneapolis, MN.
Although some examples of the disclosure may involve posture state information and data, system 120 may be employed to distribute any information relating to the treatment of patient 12 and the operation of any device associated therewith. For example, system 120 may allow therapy errors or device errors to be immediately reported to the clinician. In addition, system 120 may allow the clinician to remotely intervene in the therapy and reprogram IMD 14, patient programmer 30, or communicate with patient 12. In an additional example, the clinician may utilize system 120 to monitor multiple patients and share data with other clinicians in an effort to coordinate rapid evolution of effective treatment of patients.
Furthermore, although the disclosure is described with respect to SCS therapy, such techniques may be applicable to IMDs that convey other therapies in which posture state information is important, such as, e.g., DBS, pelvic floor stimulation, gastric stimulation, occipital stimulation, functional electrical stimulation, and the like. Also, in some aspects, techniques for evaluating posture state information, as described in this disclosure, may be applied to IMDs that are generally dedicated to sensing or monitoring and do not include stimulation or other therapy components.
FIGS. 8A-8C are conceptual illustrations of posture state spaces 140, 152, 155 within which posture state reference data may define the posture state of patient 12.
Posture state reference data may define certain regions associated with particular posture states of patient 12 within the respective posture state spaces 140, 152, 155. The output of one or more posture state sensors may be analyzed by posture state module 86 with respect to posture state spaces 140, 152, 155 to determine the posture state of patient 12. For example, if the output of one or more posture state sensors is within a particular posture region defined by posture state reference data, posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is within the posture state associated with the respective posture state region. In some cases, one or more posture state regions may be defined as posture state cones. Posture state cones may be used to define a posture state of patient 12 based on the output from a posture state sensor of a posture state according to an example method for posture state detection. A posture state cone may be centered about a posture state reference coordinate vector that corresponds to a particular posture state. In the examples of FIGS. 8 A and 8B, the posture state module 86 of IMD 14 or IMD 26 may use a posture state sensor, e.g., a three-axis accelerometer that provides data indicating the posture state of patient 12, to sense posture vectors. While the sensed data may be indicative of any posture state, postures of patient 12 will generally be used below to illustrate the concept of posture cones. As shown in FIG. 8 A, posture state space 140 represents a vertical plane dividing patient 12 from left and right sides, or the sagittal plane. A posture state parameter value from two axes of the posture state sensor may be used to determine the current posture state of patient 12 according to the posture state space 140. The posture state data may include x, y and z coordinate values. A posture cone may be defined by a reference coordinate vector for a given posture state in combination with a distance or angle defining a range of coordinate vectors within a cone surrounding the posture reference coordinate vector. Alternatively, a posture cone may be defined by a reference coordinate vector and a range of cosine values computed using the reference coordinate vector as an adjacent vector and any of the outermost vectors of the cone as a hypotenuse vector. If a sensed posture state vector is within an applicable angle or distance of the reference coordinate vector, or if the sensed posture state vector and the reference coordinate vector produce a cosine value in a specified cosine range, then posture state vector is determined to reside within the posture cone defined by the reference coordinate vector. Posture state space 140 is segmented into different posture cones that are indicative of a certain posture state of patient 12. In the example of FIG. 8 A, upright cone 142 indicates that patient 12 is sitting or standing upright, lying back cone 148 indicates that patient 12 is lying back down, lying front cone 144 indicates that patient 12 is lying chest down, and inverted cone 146 indicates that patient 12 is in an inverted position. Other cones may be provided, e.g., to indicate that patient 12 is lying on the right side or left side. For example, a lying right posture cone and a lying left posture cone positioned outside of the sagittal plane illustrated in FIG. 8 A. In particular, the lying right and lying left posture cones may be positioned in a coronal plane substantially perpendicular to the sagittal plane illustrated in FIG. 8A. For ease of illustration, lying right and lying left cones are not shown in FIG. 8A.
Vertical axis 141 and horizontal axis 143 are provided for orientation of posture state area 140, and are shown as orthogonal for purposes of illustration. However, posture cones may have respective posture reference coordinate vectors that are not orthogonal in some cases. For example, individual reference coordinate vectors for cones 142 and 146 may not share the same axis, and reference coordinate vectors for cones 144 and 148 may not share the same axis. Also, reference coordinate vectors for cones 144 and 148 may or may not be orthogonal to reference coordinates vectors for cones 142, 146. Therefore, although orthogonal axes are shown in FIG. 8A for purposes of illustration, respective posture cones may be defined by individualized reference coordinate vectors for the cones.
IMD 14 may monitor the posture state parameter value of the posture state sensor to produce a sensed coordinate vector and identify the current posture of patient 12 by identifying which cone the sensed coordinated vector of the posture state sensor module 86 resides. For example, if the posture state parameter value corresponds to a sensed coordinate vector that falls within lying front cone 144, IMD 14 determines that patient 12 is lying down on their chest. IMD 14 may store this posture information as a determined posture state or as raw output from the posture state sensor, change therapy according to the posture, or both. Additionally, IMD 14 may communicate the posture information to patient programmer 30 so that the patient programmer can present a posture state indication to patient 12.
In addition, posture state area 140 may include hysteresis zones 150A, 150B, 150C, and 150D (collectively "hysteresis zones 150"). Hysteresis zones 150 are positions within posture state area 140 where no posture cones have been defined.
Hysteresis zones 150 may be particularly useful when IMD 14 utilizes the posture state information and posture cones to adjust therapy automatically. If the posture state sensor indicates that patient 12 is in upright cone 142, IMD 14 would not detect that patient 12 has entered a new posture cone until the posture state parameter value indicates a different posture cone. For example, if IMD 14 determines that patient 12 moves to within hysteresis zone 150A from upright cone 142, IMD 14 retains the posture as upright. In this manner, IMD 14 does not change the corresponding therapy until patient 12 fully enters a different posture cone. Hysteresis zones 150 prevent IMD 14 from continually oscillating between different therapies when patient 12's posture state resides near a posture cone boundary.
Each posture cone 142, 144, 146, 148 may be defined by an angle in relation to a reference coordinate vector defined for the respective posture cone. Alternatively, some posture cones may be defined by an angle relative to a reference coordinate vector for another posture cone. For example, lying postures may be defined by an angle with respect to a reference coordinate vector for an upright posture cone. In each case, as described in further detail below, each posture cone may be defined by an angle in relation to a reference coordinate posture vector defined for a particular posture state. The reference coordinate vector may be defined based on posture sensor data generated by a posture state sensor while patient 12 occupies a particular posture state desired to be defined using the reference coordinate vector. For example, a patient may be asked to occupy a posture so that a reference coordinate vector can be sensed for the respective posture. In this manner, vertical axis 141 may be specified according to the patient's actual orientation. Then, a posture cone can be defined using the reference coordinate vector as the center of the cone.
Vertical axis 141 in FIG. 8 A may correspond to a reference coordinate vector sensed while the patient was occupying an upright posture state. Similarly, a horizontal axis 143 may correspond to a reference coordinate vector sensed while the patient is occupying a lying posture state. A posture cone may be defined with respect to the reference coordinate vector. Although a single axis is shown extending through the upright and inverted cones 142, 146, and another single axis is shown extending through the lying down and lying up cones 144, 148, individual reference coordinate vectors may be used for respective cones, and the reference coordinate vectors may not share the same axes, depending on differences between the reference coordinate vectors obtained for the posture cones.
Posture cones may be defined by the same angle or different angles, symmetrical to either axis, or asymmetrical to either axis. For example, upright cone 142 may have an angle of eighty degrees, +40 degrees to -40 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141. In some cases, lying cones may be defined relative to the reference coordinate vector of the upright cone 142. For example, lying up (lying back) cone 148 may have an angle of eighty degrees, -50 degrees to -130 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141. Inverted cone 146 may have an angle of eighty degrees, -140 degrees to +140 degrees from vertical axis 141. In addition, lying down (lying front) cone 144 may have an angle of eighty degrees, +50 degrees to +130 degrees from the positive vertical axis 141. In other examples, each posture cone may have varying angle definitions, and the angles may change during therapy delivery to achieve the most effective therapy for patient 12.
Alternatively or additionally, instead of an angle, posture cones 144, 146, 148, 148 may be defined by a cosine value or range of cosine values in relation to vertical axis 141, horizontal axis 143, or some other axis, such as, e.g., individual reference coordinate vectors for the respective cones. For example, a posture cone may be defined by a cosine value that defines the minimum cosine value, calculated using a reference coordinate vector and a respective coordinate vector sensed by a posture state sensor at any point in time. In the cosine computation, the value (adjacent/hypotenuse) can be computed using the magnitude of the coordinate reference vector as the adjacent and a vector at the outermost extent of the cone as the hypotenuse to define a range of cosine values consistent with the outer bound of the cone.
For upright cone 142, the cosine range may extend from the maximum cosine value of 1.0, corresponding to a sensed vector that matches the reference coordinate vector of the upright cone, to a minimum cosine value that corresponds to a sensed vector at the outer limit of the upright cone. As another example, for lying cone 144, the cosine range may extend from the maximum cosine value of 1.0, corresponding to a sensed vector that matches the reference coordinate vector of the lying cone, to a minimum cosine value that corresponds to a sensed vector at the outer limit of the lying cone. Alternatively, the lying cone 144 may be defined with reference to the upright cone 142, such that the cosine range may extend between a maximum and minimum values determined relative to the reference coordinate vector for the upright cone. In other examples, example posture state area 140 may include additional posture cones than those shown in FIG. 8A. For example, a reclining cone may be located between upright cone 142 and lying back cone 148 to indicate when patient 12 is reclining back (e.g., in a dorsal direction). In this position, patient 12 may need a different therapy to effectively treat symptoms. Different therapy programs may provide efficacious therapy to patient 12 when patient 12 is in each of an upright posture (e.g., within upright cone 142), lying back posture (e.g., within lying back cone 148), and a reclining back posture. Thus, a posture cone that defines the reclining back posture may be useful for providing efficacious posture-responsive therapy to patient 12. In other examples, posture state area 140 may include fewer posture cones than cones 142, 144, 146, 148 shown in FIG. 8 A. For example, inverted cone 146 may be replaced by a larger lying back cone 148 and lying front cone 144. FIG. 8B illustrates an example posture state space 152 that is a three-dimensional space in which the posture state parameter value from the posture state sensor is placed in relation to the posture cones. Posture state space 152 is substantially similar to posture state area 140 of FIG. 8 A. However, the posture state parameter value derived from all three axes of a 3 -axis accelerometer may be used to accurately determine the posture state of patient 12. In the example of FIG. 8B, posture state space 152 includes upright cone 154, lying back cone 156, and lying front cone 158. Posture state space 152 also includes hysteresis zones (not shown) similar to those of posture state area 140. In the example of FIG. 8B, the hysteresis zones are the spaces not occupied by a posture cone, e.g., upright cone 154, lying back cone 156, and lying front cone 158. Posture cones 154, 156 and 158 also are defined by a respective center line
153A, 153B, or 153C, and associated cone angle A, B or C. For example, upright cone 154 is defined by center line 153 A that runs through the center of upright cone 154. Center line 153 A may correspond to an axis of the posture state sensor or some other calibrated vector. In some examples, each center line 153 A, 153B, 153C may correspond to a posture reference coordinate vectors defined for the respective postures, e.g., the upright posture. For instance, assuming that patient 12 is standing, the DC portion of the x, y, and z signals detected by the posture state sensor of posture state module 86 define a posture vector that corresponds to center line 153 A. The x, y, and z signals may be measured while patient 12 is known to be in a specified position, e.g., standing, and the measured vector may be correlated with the upright posture state. Thereafter, when the DC portions of the posture state sensor signal are within some predetermined cone tolerance or proximity, e.g., as defined by an angle, distance or cosine value, of the posture reference coordinate vector (i.e., center line 153A), it may be determined that patient 12 is in the upright posture. In this manner, a sensed posture coordinate vector may be initially measured based on the output of one or more posture state sensors of posture state module 86, associated with a posture state, such as upright, as a reference coordinate vector, and then later used to detect a patient's posture state. As previously indicated, it may be desirable to allow some tolerance to be associated with a defined posture state, thereby defining a posture cone or other volume. For instance, in regard to the upright posture state, it may be desirable to determine that a patient who is upright but leaning slightly is still in the same upright posture state. Thus, the definition of a posture state may generally include not only a posture reference coordinate vector (e.g., center line 153A), but also a specified tolerance. One way to specify a tolerance is by providing an angle, such as cone angle A, relative to coordinate reference vector 153 A, which results in posture cone 154 as described herein. Cone angle A is the deflection angle, or radius, of upright cone 154. The total angle that each posture cone spans is double the cone angle. The cone angles A, B, and C may be generally between approximately 1 degree and approximately 70 degrees. In other examples, cone angles A, B, and C may be between approximately 10 degrees and 30 degrees. In the example of FIG. 8B, cone angles A, B, and C are approximately 20 degrees. Cone angles A, B, and C may be different, and center lines 153 A, 153B, and 153C may not be orthogonal to each other.
In some examples, a tolerance may be specified by a cosine value or range of cosine values. The use of cosine values, in some cases, may provide substantial processing efficiencies. As described above, for example, a minimum cosine value, determined using the reference coordinate vector as adjacent and sensed coordinate vector as hypotenuse, indicates the range of vectors inside the cone. If a sensed coordinate vector, in conjunction with the reference coordinate vector for a posture cone, produces a cosine value that is less than the minimum cosine value for the posture cone, the sensed coordinate vector does not reside within the pertinent posture cone. In this manner, the minimum cosine value may define the outer bound of a range of cosine values within a particular posture cone defined in part by a reference coordinate vector.
While center lines 153A, 153B, 153C of each of the posture cones 154, 156, 158, respectively, are shown in FIG. 8B as being substantially orthogonal to each other, in other examples, center lines 153 A, 153B, and 153C may not be orthogonal to each other. Again, the relative orientation of center lines 153 A, 153B, 153C may depend on the actual reference coordinate vector output of the posture state sensor of posture state module 86 of IMD 14 when patient 12 occupies the respective postures.
In some cases, all of the posture cones may be individually defined based on actual reference coordinate vectors. Alternatively, in some cases, some posture cones may be defined with reference to one or more reference coordinate vectors for one or more other posture cones. For example, lying reference coordinate vectors could be assumed to be orthogonal to an upright reference coordinate vector. Alternatively, lying reference coordinate vectors could be individually determined based on sensed coordinate vectors when the patient is in respective lying postures. Hence, the actual reference coordinate vectors for different postures may be orthogonal or non-orthogonal with respect to one another.
In addition to upright cone 154, lying back cone 156, and lying front cone 158, posture state space 152 may include additional posture cones. For example, a lying right cone may be provided to define a patient posture in which patient 12 is lying on his right side and a lying left cone may be provided to define a patient posture in which patient 12 is lying on his left side. In some cases, the lying right cone and lying left cone may be positioned approximately orthogonal to upright cones 154, in approximately the same plane as lying back cone 156 and lying front cone 158. Moreover, posture state space 152 may include an inverted cone positioned approximately opposite of upright cone 154. Such a cone indicates that the patient's posture is inverted from the upright posture, i.e., upside down.
In some examples, to detect the posture state of a patient, posture state module 86 of IMD 14 may determine a sensed coordinate vector based on the posture sensor data generated by one or more posture state sensors, and then analyze the sensed coordinate vector with respect to posture cones 154, 156, 158 of FIG. 8B. For example, in a case in which a posture cone is defined by a reference coordinate vector and a tolerance angle, e.g., tolerance angle "A," posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 154 by calculating the angle between the sensed coordinate vector and reference coordinate vector, and then determine whether the angle is less than the tolerance angle "A." If so, posture state module 86 determines that the sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 154 and detects that patient 12 is in the upright posture. If posture state module 86 determines that sensed coordinate vector is not within upright posture cone 154, posture state module 86 detects that patient 12 is not in the upright posture.
Posture state module 86 may analyze the sensed coordinate vector in posture state space 152 with respect to each individual defined posture cone, such as posture cones 156 and 158, in such a manner to determine the posture state of patient 12. For example, posture state module 86 may determine the angle between the sensed coordinate vector and reference coordinate vector of individual posture cones defined for the posture state, and compare the determined angle to the tolerance angle defined for the respective posture cone. In this manner, a sensed coordinate vector may be evaluated against each posture cone until a match is detected, i.e., until the sensed coordinate vector is found to reside in one of the posture cones. Hence, a cone-by-cone analysis is one option for posture detection.
In other examples, different posture detection analysis techniques may be applied. For example, instead of testing a sensed coordinate vector against posture cones on a cone-by-cone basis, a phased approach may be applied where the sensed coordinate vector is classified as either upright or not upright. In this case, if the sensed coordinate vector is not in the upright cone, posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinate vector is in a lying posture, either by testing the sensed coordinate vector against individual lying posture cones or testing the sensed coordinate vector against a generalized lying posture volume, such as a donut- or toroid-like volume that includes all of the lying postures, and may be defined using an angle or cosine range relative to the upright vector, or relative to a modified or virtual upright vector as will be described. In some cases, if lying postures are defined by cones, the lying volume could be defined as a logical OR of the donut- or toroid-like volume and the volumes of the lying posture cones. If the cones are larger such that some portions extend beyond the lying volume, then those portions can be added to the lying volume using the logical OR-like operation.
If the sensed coordinate vector resides within the donut- or toroid-like lying volume, then the sensed coordinate vector may be tested against each of a plurality of lying posture cones in the lying volume. Alternatively, the posture detection technique may not use lying cones. Instead, a posture detection technique may rely on a proximity test between the sensed coordinate vector and each of the reference coordinate vectors for the respective lying postures. The proximity test may rely on angle, cosine value or distance to determine which of the lying posture reference coordinate vectors is closest to the sensed coordinate vector. For example, the reference coordinate vector that produces the largest cosine value with the sensed coordinate vector as hypotenuse and the reference coordinate vector as adjacent is the closest reference coordinate vector. In this case, the lying posture associated with the reference coordinate vector producing the largest cosine value is the detected posture. Hence, there are a variety of ways to detect posture, such as using posture cones, using an upright posture cone with lying volume and lying posture cone test, or using an upright posture cone with lying volume and lying vector proximity test. As a further illustration of an example posture detection technique, posture state module 86 may first determine whether patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state or upright posture state by analyzing the sensed coordinate vector in posture state space 152 with respect to an axis 153 A for the upright posture state. Axis 153 A may correspond to the upright reference coordinate vector. For example, angle "A" may be used to define upright posture cone 154, as described above, and angles "D" and "E" may be used to define the vector space in which patient 12 may be generally considered to be in the lying posture state, regardless of the particular posture state cone, e.g., lying front cone 158, lying back cone 156, lying right cone (not shown), or lying left cone (not shown), in which the sensed coordinate vector falls. If it is determined that a sensed coordinate vector is not within an angle A of the axis 153 A, then it may be determined that the patient is not in the upright posture indicated by the upright posture cone. In this case, it may next be determined whether a sensed coordinated vector is generally in a lying posture space volume, which may be considered somewhat donut- or toroid-like, and may be defined relative to the upright reference coordinate vector 153 A. As shown, angles "D" and "E" define the minimum and maximum angle values, respectively, that a sensed vector may form with respect to axis 153 A of patient 12 for a determination to be made that the patient is generally in the lying posture state. Again, cosine values may be used instead of angles to determine the positions of sensed coordinate vectors relative to posture cones or other posture volumes, or relative to reference coordinate vectors.
As illustrated, angles "D" and "E' may be defined with respect to vertical axis 153 A (which may correspond to an upright reference coordinate vector), which is the reference coordinate vector for the upright posture cone, rather than with respect to a reference coordinate vector of a lying posture state cone. If a sensed vector is within the angular range of D to E, relative to axis 153 A, then it can be determined by posture state module 86 that the patient is generally in a lying posture. Alternatively, in some examples, an angle C could be defined according to a generally horizontal axis 153C (which may correspond to one of the lying reference coordinate vectors). In this case, if a sensed vector is within angle C of axis 153C, it can be determined by posture state module 86 that the patient is in a lying posture. In each case, the region generally defining the lying posture state may be referred to as a posture donut or posture toroid, rather than a posture cone. The posture donut may generally encompass a range of vectors that are considered to be representative of various lying down postures.
As an alternative, posture state module 86 may rely on cosine values or a range of cosine values to define the posture donut or toroid with respect to axis 153 A. When the sensed vector falls within the vector space defined by axis 153 A and angles "D" and "E", or produces a cosine value with the reference coordinate vector 153 A in a prescribed range, posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state. For example, if the sensed vector and reference coordinate vector 153 produce a cosine value in a first range, the posture is upright. If the cosine value is in a second range, the posture is lying. If the cosine value is outside of the first and second ranges, the posture may be indeterminate. The first range may correspond to the range of cosine values that would be produced by vectors in posture cone 154 defined by angle A, and the second range may be correspond to cosine values that would be produced by vectors in the posture donut defined by angles D and E.
When the sensed vector fall within the vector space defined by axis 153 A and angles "D" and "E", as indicated by angle or cosine value, posture state module 86 may then determine the particular lying posture state occupied by patient 12, e.g., lying front, lying back, lying right, or lying left. To determine the particular lying posture state occupied by patient 12, posture state module 86 may analyze the sensed vector with respect to reference coordinate vectors for individual lying posture state cones, e.g., lying front cone 156, lying back cone 158, lying right cone (not shown), and lying left cone (not shown), using one more techniques previously described, such as angle or cosine techniques. For example, posture state module 86 may determine whether the sensed coordinated vector resides within one of the lying posture state cones and, if so, select the posture state corresponding to that cone as the detected posture state. FIG. 8C illustrates an example posture state space 155 that is a three- dimensional space substantially similar to posture state space 152 of FIG. 8B. Posture state space 155 includes upright posture cone 157 defined by reference coordinate vector 167. The tolerance that defines upright posture cone 157 with respect to reference coordinate vector 167 may include a tolerance angle or cosine value, as described above. In contrast to determining whether a sensed coordinate vector resides in a lying cone, FIG. 8C illustrates a method for detecting a lying posture based on proximity of a sensed coordinate vector to one of the reference coordinate vectors for the lying postures. As shown in FIG. 8C, posture state space 155 includes four reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165, which are associated with lying left, lying right, lying front, and lying back posture states, respectively. Posture state module 86 may have defined each of the four reference coordinated vector 159, 161, 163, 165 based on the output of one or more posture sensors while patient 12 occupied each of the corresponding posture states. Unlike lying front and lying back posture cones 158, 156 in the example of FIG. 8B, the posture state reference data for the four defined posture states corresponding to reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 need not include angles defined relative to the respective reference vector in a manner that defines a posture cone. Rather, as will be described below, the respective posture state reference vectors may be analyzed with respect to one another in terms of cosine values to determine which particular reference coordinate vector is nearest in proximity to a sensed coordinate vector.
In some examples, to determine the posture state of patient 12, posture state module 85 may determine whether a sensed coordinate vector is within upright posture cone 157 by analyzing the sensed coordinate vector in view of the tolerance angle or cosine value(s) defined with respect to upright posture reference coordinate vector 167, or whether the sensed vector is within a posture donut or toroid defined by a range of angles (as in FIG. 8B) or cosine values with respect to upright posture reference coordinate vector 167, in which case posture state module 86 may determine that patient 12 is in a general lying posture state.
If posture state module 86 determines that patient 12 is occupying a general lying posture state, posture state module 86 may then calculate the cosine value of the sensed coordinate vector with respect to each lying reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165. In such a case, posture state module 86 determines the particular lying posture state of patient 12, i.e., lying left, lying right, lying front, lying back, based on which cosine value is the greatest of the four cosine values. For example, if the cosine value calculated with the sensed vector as the hypotenuse and the lying front reference vector 163 as the adjacent vector is the largest value of the four cosine values, the sensed vector may be considered closest in proximity to lying front reference vector out of the four total reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165. Accordingly, posture state module 85 may determine that patient 12 is occupying a lying front posture state.
In some examples, posture state module 86 may determine whether patient 12 is generally in a lying posture state based on the relationship of a sensed vector to upright reference vector 167. For example, as described above, a lying posture donut or toroid may be defined with respect to upright posture reference vector 167, e.g., using angles D and E as in FIG. 8B. Such a technique may be appropriate when lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 define a common plane substantially orthogonal to upright posture reference vector 167. However, the lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 may not in fact be orthogonal to the upright reference coordinate vector 167. Also, the lying posture reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 may not reside in the same plane.
To account for non-orthogonal reference vectors, in other examples, a lying posture donut or toroid may be defined with respect to a modified or virtual upright reference vector 169 rather than that actual upright posture reference vector 167. Again, such a technique may be used in situations in which the lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 are not in a common plane, or the common plane of reference vector 159, 161, 163, 165 is not substantially orthogonal to upright reference vector 167. However, use of the example technique is not limited to such situations.
To define virtual upright reference vector 169, posture state module 86 may compute the cross-products of various combinations of lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 and average the cross product values. In the example of FIG. 8C, posture state module 86 may compute four cross products and average the four cross product vectors to yield the virtual upright vector. The cross product operations that may be performed are: lying left vector 159 x lying back vector 165, lying back vector 165 x lying right vector 161, lying right vector 161 x lying front vector 163, and lying front vector 163 x lying left vector 159. Each cross product yields a vector that is orthogonal to the two lying reference vectors that were crossed. Averaging each of the cross product vectors yields a virtual upright reference vector that is orthogonal to lying plane 171 approximately formed by lying reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165.
Using virtual upright reference vector 169, posture state module 86 may define a lying posture donut or toroid in a manner similar to that described with respect to upright reference vector 167, but instead with respect to virtual upright reference vector 169. In particular, when posture state module 86 determines that the patient is not in the upright posture, the posture state module determines whether the patient is in a lying posture based on an angle or cosine value with respect to the virtual upright reference vector 169.
Posture state module 86 may still determine whether patient 12 is in an upright posture state using upright posture cone 157. If posture state module 86 determines that patient 12 is occupying a general lying posture state based on the analysis of the sensed coordinate vector with respect to virtual upright reference vector 169, posture state module 86 may then calculate the cosine value of the sensed coordinate vector (as hypotenuse) with respect to each lying reference coordinate vectors 159, 161, 163, 165 (as adjacent).
In such a case, posture state module 86 determines the particular lying posture state of patient 12, i.e., lying left, lying right, lying front, lying back, based on which cosine value is the greatest of the four cosine values. For example, if the cosine value calculated with the lying front reference vector 163 is the largest value of the four cosine values, the sensed vector may be considered closest in proximity to lying front reference vector out of the four total reference vectors 159, 161, 163, 165. Accordingly, posture state module 85 may determine that patient 12 is occupying a lying front posture state. Additionally, posture state definitions are not limited to posture cones. For example, a definition of a posture state may involve a posture vector and a tolerance, such as a maximum distance from the posture vector. So long as a detected posture vector is within this maximum distance from the posture vector that is included in the definition of the posture state, patient 12 may be classified as being in that posture state. This alternative method may allow posture states to be detected without calculating angles, e.g., as described above with respect to the description of posture cones.
Further to the foregoing, posture states may be defined that are specific to a particular patient's activities and/or profession. For instance, a bank teller may spend a significant portion of his working day leaning forward at a particular angle. Apatient- specific "Leaning Forward" posture state including this angle may be defined. The cone angle or other tolerance value selected for this posture state may be specific to the particular posture state definition for this patient. In this manner, the defined posture states may be tailored to a specific user, and need not be "hard-coded" in the IMD. In some examples, individual posture states may be linked together, thereby tying posture states to a common set of posture reference data and a common set of therapy parameter values. This may, in effect, merge multiple posture cones for purposes of posture state-based selection of therapy parameter values. For example, all lying posture state cones (back, front, left, right) could be treated as one cone or a donut/toroid, e.g., using a technique the same as or similar to that described with respect to FIGS. 8B and 8C to define a donut, toroid or other volume. One program group or common set of therapy parameter values may apply to all posture states in the same merged cone, according to the linking status of the posture states, as directed via external programmer 20.
Merging posture cones or otherwise linking a plurality of posture states together may be useful for examples in which a common set of therapy parameter values provides efficacious therapy to patient 12 for the plurality of posture states. In such an example, linking a plurality of posture states together may help decrease the power consumption required to provide posture-responsive therapy to patient 12 because the computation required to track patient posture states and provide responsive therapy adjustments may be minimized when a plurality of posture states are linked together.
Linking of posture states also may permit a therapy parameter value adjustment in one posture state to be associated with multiple posture states at the same time. For example, the same amplitude level for one or more programs may be applied to all of the posture states in a linked set of posture states. Alternatively, the lying down posture states may all reside within a "donut" or toroid that would be used instead of separate comes 156 and 158, for example. The toroid may be divided into sectional segments that each correspond to different posture states, such as lying (back), lying (front), lying (right), lying (left) instead of individual cones. In this case, different posture reference data and therapy parameter values may be assigned to the different sectional segments of the toroid.
A posture state definition may also include an activity component, e.g., an activity level, in addition to a posture component, e.g., a posture cone. For example, an "upright active" posture state may be defined by upright posture cone 154 in combination with a "medium" or "high" activity level. Whereas, the "upright" posture state may be defined by upright posture cone 154 in combination with a "low" activity level. As described previously, other gradations, e.g., high, medium high, medium, medium low, and low, or numerical scales may be used to characterize activity level.
As may be appreciated, patient 12 will occupy different posture states as he goes about daily life. For instance, when patient 12 is in an upright position such that the posture state parameter value lies within upright posture cone 154, posture state module 86 will detect the patient's posture state as upright. If patient 12 transitions from the upright position to lying on his back, the detected posture state parameter value will transition from being located within upright cone 154 into the space that is not associated with any posture state definition. From there, the detected posture state parameter value will transition into lying back cone 156, which indicates that patient 12 is lying on his back.
According to the current example, patient 12 may be receiving some therapy associated with the upright posture state while the detected posture state parameter value resides within upright cone 154. This therapy may optionally continue as the posture state parameter value enters the space that is not associated with any defined posture state or some other therapy may be delivered during this time. In one example, some change in therapy may be initiated as the detected posture state parameter value enters lying back cone 156, which indicate that patient 12 is lying on his back. Thus, a change in therapy may be initiated as the patient's posture state is reclassified. Alternatively or additionally, some other action may be taken as a result of this posture state reclassification.
As previously discussed, a dwell time may be imposed between the time the patient's posture state is reclassified from a previous posture state to a newly detected posture state and the time a response is initiated as a result of this reclassification. This dwell time may, if desired, be programmable, and may be different for different posture states or different posture state transitions. In one example, the dwell time may be selected based on the patient's previous posture state classification (in this example, the upright posture state). In another example, the dwell time may be selected based on the newly-assumed posture state (in this example, the lying back posture state). In yet another example, this dwell time may be selected based on the particular posture state transition (e.g., upright to lying back) that was experienced by patient 12. According to another aspect, the dwell times may further be specific to a particular type of response or action that is to be initiated, such as therapy adjustment of notification of posture change.
The use of dwell time may serve to stabilize the system by ensuring that transient, temporarily-assumed posture states do not prompt a therapy adjustment or other response. If the detected posture state is only transitory, as may be the case if patient 12 is transitioning to a final posture state by assuming one or more temporary posture states, the temporarily-assumed posture states will not cause delivered therapy to be adjusted in an unwanted or premature manner. Moreover, if patient 12 aborts a posture state transition, as by changing his mind mid- way through the transition, the aborted transition likewise will not prompt a therapy change if the dwell time is not exceeded while the patient is in the transient posture state. Instead, the therapy is not adjusted and continues to be delivered in a manner appropriate for the previous stable posture.
If desired, a dwell time may be selected that is specific to a particular response. As an example, upon entry of the lying back posture state, more than one response may be initiated. One such response may involve adjustment of a therapy parameter, e.g., an increase or decrease of an amplitude used to deliver stimulation therapy. Another response may involve initiation of a different therapy, e.g., initiation of administration of a therapeutic substance to patient 12. Yet another response may involve providing some type of notification to external programmer 20, e.g., patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60. For each response that is to occur as a result of the newly- detected posture state, a different dwell time may be imposed. Thus, dwell times, if desired, may be posture state-specific, posture state transition-specific, and/or response- specific. While patient 12 resides in a given posture state or transitions between posture states, he may make therapy adjustments, e.g., manually via patient programmer 30. In some cases, patient 12 may make therapy adjustments relative to therapy delivered automatically by IMD 14 based on posture state detection. Hence, patient 12 may manually override some automated therapy parameter settings in some instances. Patient therapy adjustments may indicate that automated therapy parameter settings are not appropriate for patient 12 in a given posture state, or that it may be desirable to adjust the automated therapy parameter settings in order to improve therapeutic efficacy. A clinician may analyze patient therapy adjustment data to adjust therapy parameter settings for various posture states. Alternatively, or additionally, IMD 14 may be configured to automatically adjust therapy based on patient therapy adjustment data. In addition to indicating whether automated therapy settings are appropriate, patient therapy adjustments may provide an indication that dwell times are too short or too long. In this case, it may be desirable to adjust the dwell time based on patient therapy adjustment data. To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, patient therapy adjustment data may be recorded and analyzed by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 (which may be a patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60). Therapy adjustments made by the patient during the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too long. Likewise, therapy adjustments made by the patient after expiration of the dwell time may indicate that the dwell time is too short. Based on analysis of the patient therapy adjustment data, the dwell time can be adjusted by IMD 14, programmer 20, or a user such as a clinician. In particular, the dwell time can be adjusted to a length of time that is appropriate for the patient and/or posture state. To help ensure that the dwell time is set to an appropriate length of time, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may record and analyze therapy adjustment data indicating therapy adjustments may by a user, such as a patient. The therapy adjustments may be manual therapy adjustments entered by a user via programmer 30. The therapy adjustment data may indicate the timing of the therapy adjustments relative to dwell time and detected posture states, the parameters that were adjusted, the parameter values selected by the user, and other pertinent therapy adjustment information.
The therapy adjustment data may be analyzed automatically by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 to determine whether the dwell time should be adjusted. If so, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may automatically adjust the dwell time. In other examples, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may store patient therapy adjustment data for analysis by a clinician. The clinician then may consider adjustments to dwell time or dwell times based on the therapy adjustment data.
In some cases, the patient therapy adjustment data may be collected and stored by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 during a therapy session in which IMD 14 delivers therapy to patient 12, between successive programming sessions. IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may automatically adjust dwell time during a therapy session. Alternatively, a clinician may analyzed the patient therapy adjustment data during the next programming session, e.g., in-clinic, and adjust the programming of IMD 14 to apply adjusted dwell time or dwell times in the next therapy session.
A therapy adjustment that is entered after the detection of a newly detected posture state but before expiration of the dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would like IMD 14 to transition more quickly to particular therapy setting upon reaching the new posture state. For example, patient 12 may experience lack of pain coverage or other discomfort if IMD 14 does not deliver a therapy adjustment until expiration of a prolonged dwell time. Instead, patient 12 may desire that the therapy adjustment be delivered more quickly upon detection of the new posture state. In this case, based on therapy adjustment data, IMD 14, programmer 20 or a user such as a clinician may determine that the pertinent dwell time is too long and should be shortened. By shortening the length of the dwell time, IMD 12 may respond more quickly to the detected posture state and thereby provide the therapy adjustment to patient 12 more quickly upon assuming the detected posture state. As another illustration, if the therapy adjustment data indicates that the patient adjusted therapy following detection of a posture state and after expiration of the dwell time, and the adjustment tends to return close to or toward the therapy delivered for the previous posture state, IMD 14, programmer 20 or a clinician may determine that the patient is not yet in need of the therapy adjustment for the newly detected posture state. For example, if patient 12 does begin to feel adverse effects on efficacy until some period of time after a posture state has stabilized, i.e., until some time after the dwell time, the patient may seek to return to the previous therapy setting, which may have been comfortable for the previous stable posture.
Until the time that patient 12 begins to feel adverse effects produced by the new posture, the patient may feel more comfortable with the previous therapy parameters delivered for the previous posture state. Based on analysis of the therapy adjustment data, IMD 14, programmer 20 or a clinician may determine that the length of the dwell time should be increased. In some cases, a therapy adjustment made after expiration of the dwell time may be evaluated to determine whether it is consistent with a return close to or toward the therapy delivered for the previous stable posture as additional confirmation that it may be desirable to lengthen the dwell time.
In general, IMD 14, programmer 20, or a combination of both may perform a method comprising delivering therapy to a patient, and detecting a posture state transition of a patient. Upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may adjust the therapy based on the posture state transition, detect a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjust the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time. As will be described, the dwell time may be adjusted if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold. The dwell time may be reduced based on patient adjustment timing if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time, or increased based on patient adjustment timing if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time. In some cases, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may determine whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition, and adjust the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time and the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition. Therapy may be adjusted based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, where at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions. In this case, adjusting the dwell time may include adjusting different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient therapy adjustments detected during or after the respective dwell times. FIG. 9A is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to one example. This diagram illustrates using detection of posture states to control delivery of therapy, although such detection may be used for initiating other responses, such as notification or data storage, as discussed above. At time TO, it will be assumed that a first stable posture state has already been detected and is being used as the basis for delivery of therapy with a first set of therapy parameters. In particular, IMD 14 delivers therapy with therapy parameters that have been specified for the particular posture state, or perhaps a group of posture states. In the example of FIG. 9 A, the therapy will be described in terms of a adjustment of therapy amplitude, referred to as a therapy level, although other therapy adjustments may be made. As shown in FIG. 9 A, IMD 14 delivers the therapy at a first therapy level,
Therapy Level 1 , which has been associated with posture state PS 1. At time Tl , a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. It will be assumed that a different therapy level, Therapy Level 2, has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to Therapy Level 2 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed. In particular, a timer/counter, which may be referred to as a "dwell timer," is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change. Different dwell times may be used for different posture states or posture state transitions, or the same dwell time could be use for all posture states and posture state transitions.
As previously discussed, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In a simple example, one dwell time may be used for all posture state changes. In a more complex system, the dwell time may be selected based on the particular posture state change or transition that is occurring (e.g., upright to lying front, lying front to lying back, or the like), based on the most-recent stable posture state, based on the newly-detected posture state, based on a response type (e.g., therapy adjustment, notification, or data storage), and/or based on some other monitored condition. For instance, the dwell time DTl may be selected based on the previous stable posture state PSl that was assumed by patient 12 prior to the most recent posture state transition. Alternatively, the dwell time DTl may instead be selected based on the newly-detected posture PS2. In another example, the specific transition from PSl to PS2 may be used to select the dwell time. Other system conditions, such as physiological conditions of patient 12, e.g., heart rate or blood pressure, may be used to select dwell time.
In the current example of FIG. 9A, dwell time DTl expires at time T2, as indicated by arrow 220. Since the patient's posture state did not change throughout the dwell time, upon expiration of this dwell time, the level of therapy delivery is changed from Therapy Level 1 , which is associated with PS 1 , to Therapy Level 2, which is associated with PS2. This change may occur as a single step function, as shown by step function 224. However, in another example, the change will occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function by which the therapy level changes somewhat gradually in a series of small steps or a continuous change. For more gradual adjustment, any type of linear or non- linear ramp or exponential attack function may be used, as shown by dashed lines 226, to achieve the target Therapy Level 2. The type of ramp or attack function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level occurs may be programmable. At time T3, the patient's posture state again reverts to posture state PSl. Rather than immediately revert back to Therapy Level 1 , a dwell time is imposed. In this example, the dwell time selected for this situation, dwell time DT2, is different than the time DTl used when patient 12 entered posture state PS2. This selected dwell time, which is represented by arrow 227, may be based on any of the considerations discussed above. Alternatively, a universal dwell time may be employed for use when any posture transition is detected, as previously mentioned.
As with the case discussed above, dwell time DT2 expires at time T4 without patient 12 shifting posture states. Therefore, the therapy level associated with PSl is again delivered to patient 12. This reversion to Therapy Level 1 is shown to occur as a step function 228. However, any type of linear ramp or decay function may be selected instead, as shown by dashed lines 230. The function selected to respond to a decrease in therapy level may be different than the function selected to respond to an increase in therapy level. That is, if desired, the one of functions 226 that is selected in response to a therapy increase is not required to correspond to the one of functions 230 that is selected in response to a therapy decrease. In the foregoing manner, dwell times may be imposed between the time a shift in posture state is detected and the time a response, which in this case is a therapy level adjustment, is initiated.
FIG. 9B is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to another example of the disclosure. This timing diagram, like the one discussed in regards to
FIG. 9A, depicts delivery of therapy at various therapy levels. These therapy levels are delivered in response to detected posture states. At time TO, in FIG. 9B, a posture state PSl has already been detected and is being used to deliver therapy for that posture state PSl at Therapy Level 1. At time Tl, a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. As was the case in the foregoing example, a different Therapy Level 2 is associated with this posture state. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to Therapy Level 2 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time DTl is imposed, as shown by arrow 234.
At time T2, before this dwell time DTl expires, the patient's posture state changes again to a third posture state PS3, which is different from the original posture state PSl. Therefore, the timer associated with DTl is reset, and a timer is started for this third posture state PS3, as indicated by arrow 236. The dwell time associated with this timer, DT2, is different from the dwell time DTl used for PS2, although this need not be the case in other examples.
At time T3, the patient's posture again shifts back to the original posture PSl . Since this occurs prior to expiration of dwell time DT2, as may be seen by arrow 236, the dwell timer that was started upon the patient's classification in posture state PS3 is reset. Once again, no therapy change occurs because the applicable dwell time has not expired. In this case, therapy is still being delivered at Therapy level 1 , which is the therapy level associated with PS 1. No dwell timer needs to be started, since therapy is already being delivered at the level associated with this newly-assumed posture state of PSl.
At time T4, patient 12 assumes posture state PS3 again. Therefore, a dwell timer is started to time dwell time DT2, as shown by arrow 238. At time T5, the dwell timer expires while patient 12 is still assuming posture state PS3. Therefore, the associated response is initiated, which in this example, is an adjustment in therapy to Therapy Level 2. As was the case in FIG. 9 A, the therapy adjustment may be initiated as a step function. However, in one example, the change will occur over time, as a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function, such as an exponential ramp function. The current example of FIG. 9B shows the change in therapy occurring as a ramp function, with an increase to the target Therapy Level 2 achieved over a therapy adjustment time indicated by arrow 240, which in one example may be programmable. Although the therapy adjustment in FIG. 9B is depicted as an increase in therapy level for purposes of illustration, the therapy adjustment could be a decrease in therapy level, depending on the difference in therapy level for posture state PSl and posture state PS3.
The foregoing examples of FIGS. 9 A and 9B assume that dwell times will be automatically selected based on the newly-assumed postures. For instance, in FIG. 9B, dwell time DTl is used for newly-assumed posture state PS2, whereas dwell time DT2 is used for newly-assumed posture state PS3. In another example, the previously- detected stable posture state could be used for this purpose. For instance, in FIG. 9B, a dwell time associated with posture state PSl (rather than new posture state PS2) could be selected for use after the re-classification of patient 12 in posture state PS2 at time Tl . Accordingly, dwell times may be selected in a variety of ways.
FIG. 9C is a timing diagram illustrating use of dwell times according to yet another example of the disclosure. This diagram describes use of multiple dwell times in response to a single detected posture state change. These dwell times are used to initiate multiple responses. At time TO, it is assumed that patient 12 has been classified in a stable posture state PSl and a therapy level associated with this posture state, Therapy Level 1, is being used to deliver therapy to patient 12. At time Tl, patient 12 is classified in a second, different posture state PS2. It will be assumed that a different Therapy Level 2 is associated with this posture state. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to Therapy Level 2 in response to re-classification of the patient's posture state, a dwell time DTl is imposed. In particular, a timer is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change and that will be used to initiate a change in therapy level. This dwell time DTl is represented by arrow 242. In addition, in this example, a second timer is started that is associated with a different dwell time DTT that is longer than the dwell time DTl, as indicated by arrow 246. This second time will be used to initiate a response other than the change in therapy level. For instance, this other dwell time DTl ' may be used to change the level of some therapy other than that represented by FIG. 9C, to start another therapy, stop another therapy, initiate a notification, prompt storing of data, start a communication session, or initiate some other response. In this example, therapy adjustment may be initiated upon expiration of dwell time DTl, but the other response is initiated later, upon expiration of dwell time DTl '. At time T2, the first dwell timer associated with dwell time DTl expires, as shown by arrow 242. Therefore, the therapy level is changed to Therapy Level 2. This change is not immediate in this example, but rather occurs according to an exponential attack function, as shown by curve 244. At time T3, before the second dwell timer associated with dwell time DTT expires, patient 12 changes his posture state to PS3. Thus, this second dwell timer is reset, and the response associated with this second timer is not initiated. Instead, at least one timer associated with posture state PS3 is started. In this example, a first dwell timer is started for a dwell time DTl, as shown by arrow 248. This dwell timer will be associated with a change in therapy to a level that is associated with PS3. A second dwell timer is also started in response to this change to posture state PS3 that will be used to initiate a second response. This second dwell timer will expire after the dwell time DTT, as indicated by arrow 250.
At time T4, the first dwell timer associated with time DTl expires, and therapy levels are therefore adjusted to levels associated with posture state PS3, which in this example will be assumed to be Therapy Level 3. As was the case with Therapy Level 2, the change does not occur immediately, but occurs using an exponential attack function shown by curve 252. At time T5, the second dwell timer associated with DTT also expires, resulting in initiation of the second response, which may be any one of a number of responses associated with this shift to posture state 3.
In this example, the dwell times that are selected are the same for both posture changes. That is, when the posture change to PS2 occurs at time Tl, the dwell time DTl is selected for use in initiating a change in therapy level, and the dwell time DTT is selected for use in initiating a second response. These same two dwell times are also selected for use when the shift to posture state PS3 occurs. Thus, this example shows that the dwell times may be response-specific, and not based on the posture states being assumed. Of course, the same dwell time may be used to initiate multiple responses in another example. In still another example, the selected dwell time may be both response-specific, and also based on posture state information (e.g., most-recent stable posture state, newly-assumed posture state, transition between the two, and so forth.) It may be appreciated that FIGS. 9A-9C are merely examples, and that many other scenarios may be contemplated for using one or more dwell times to control initiation of therapy adjustments and one or more additional responses as a result of one or more posture state changes. FIG. 10 is an example timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment prior to expiration of the dwell time. At time TO, it will be assumed that a first stable posture state has already been detected and is being used to control therapy delivery at a first therapy level, therapy level TLl, which has been associated with posture state PSl. At time Tl, a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. It will be assumed that a different therapy level, therapy level TL3, has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to therapy level TL3 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed. In particular, a timer/counter, which may be referred to as a "dwell timer," is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change. As previously discussed, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In a simple example, one dwell time may be used for all posture state changes. In a more complex system, the dwell time may be selected on the particular posture state change that is occurring, on the most-recent stable posture state, on the newly-detected posture state, on a response type, and/or on some other monitored condition. For instance, the dwell time DTl may be selected based on the previous stable posture state PSl that was assumed by patient 12 prior to the most recent posture state transition. Alternatively, the dwell time DTl may instead be selected based on the newly-detected posture PS2. In another example, the specific transition from PS 1 to PS2 may be used to select the dwell time. Other system conditions, such as physiological conditions of patient 12, e.g., heart rate or blood pressure, may be used to select dwell time. In the current example, dwell time DTl expires at time T3, as indicated by arrow 260. At time T2, prior to expiration of dwell time DTl, the level of therapy delivery changes from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2. This change may occur in response to a manual therapy adjustment received from a user, e.g., via external programmer 20. The therapy adjustment may be manual in the sense that the adjustment occurs in response to user input rather than based on a therapy level previously associated with the new posture state, PS2. Manual changes may generally encompass any changes based on user input, including input based on manipulation of buttons, touchscreen media, or other media such as voice recognition.
The change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 in the example of FIG. 10 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 262. However, in another example, the change may occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function. For example, any type of linear or non- linear ramp or exponential attack function may be used to achieve the target therapy level TL2 in response to a manual therapy adjustment by a user such as patient 12. The type of ramp or attack function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level TL2 occurs may be programmable.
Additionally, since the patient's posture state did not change throughout dwell time DTl, upon expiration of this dwell time DTl, the level of therapy delivery is changed from the adjusted therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3, which is associated with PS2. This change may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 224. However, as previously described, other types of transitions are also contemplated.
The user-initiated therapy adjustment at T2 may indicate that a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred. For example, a user-initiated therapy adjustment that occurs during dwell time DTl may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with a newly assumed posture state, e.g., posture state PS2 in the example of FIG. 10, at an earlier time. In some examples, the therapy change received during dwell time DTl may also be examined to determine if a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred. The dwell time may be adjusted automatically by IMD 14 or programmer 20, or by a user such as a clinician.
As one example, if the process is implemented in IMD 14, processor 80 of IMD 14 may determine if the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is consistent with a therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2, i.e., the change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL3. Although processor 80 is primarily described herein for purposes of example, any suitable processor may perform the functions attributed to processor 80. For example, processor 92 of IMD 26 and/or processor 104 of external programmer 20 may perform some or all of the functions attributed to processor 80. In the example of FIG. 10, the newly-assumed posture state PS2 is associated with a higher therapy level TL3 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl . Therefore, the therapy level may be automatically increased in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may determine whether the therapy level TL2 associated with the user- initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is also higher than therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl. Processor 80 may also determine whether the therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is closer to the therapy level TL3 associated with the newly- assumed posture state PS2 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1. If the therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is higher than therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is consistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. In some examples, processor 80 may also compare therapy level TL2 associated with the user- initiated therapy adjustment to therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 to determine how closely the user-initiated therapy level matches the therapy level associated with the new posture state. For example, processor 80 may determine if therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 than therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl.
If therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl was lower than therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is inconsistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may also determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl is inconsistent with the therapy change automatically initiated in response to the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 if therapy level TL2 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1 than therapy level TL3 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2. As a result, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received during dwell time DTl does not indicate that a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred. Instead, it may be determined that the therapy adjustment was an anomaly or that the therapy levels TLl and TL3 may not be appropriate for the newly detected posture state.
If processor 80 determines that the user-initiated therapy adjustment is an indication that a shorter dwell time DTl is preferred, processor 80 may automatically decrease dwell time DTl. For example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to end at time T2 such that the new dwell time DTl corresponds to the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T2 when the user-initiated therapy change occurred. In other examples, processor 80 may use other techniques for decreasing dwell time DTl, e.g., decreasing dwell time DTl by a specified percentage. Again, although processor 80 of IMD 14 is described for purposes of illustration, various aspects of the techniques described in this disclosure may be performed by IMD 14 or programmer 20 alone or in combination with one another. In some examples, processor 80 may monitor and record user-initiated therapy adjustments each time a dwell time is initiated in response to a posture state transition. FIG. 11 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded during various occurrences of dwell time DTl. As previously described, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In the example of FIG. 11, dwell time DTl may be specific to the particular posture state change that is occurring, i.e., the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Although other techniques for selecting dwell time DTl are also contemplated.
FIG. 11 is substantially similar to FIG. 10, but includes additional user-initiated therapy adjustments that occurred during other occurrences of dwell time DTl, i.e., after patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. As previously described, dwell time DTl is initiated at time Tl in response to patient 12 transitioning from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Dwell time DTl expires at time T3. Since, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11 , patient 12 did not transition from posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl, therapy delivery according to therapy level TL3 associated with posture state PS2 is initiated at time T3.
At times T2, T4, T5, and T6, user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As illustrated in FIG. 11, each of therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 corresponding to times T2, T4, T5, and T6, respectively, are higher than therapy level TLl . Therefore, each of these recorded therapy adjustments may be consistent with the automatic therapy increase from therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl to therapy level TL3 associated with posture state PS2 expected when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Each of times T2, T4, T5, and T6 and corresponding therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shorter dwell time DTl . In other examples, processor 80 may examine how closely the adjusted therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 match therapy level TL3 associated with newly assumed posture state PS3, e.g., whether each of therapy levels TL2, TL4, TL5, and TL6 is closer to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl or therapy level TL3 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2, to determine whether each of the recorded therapy adjustments indicates that patient 12 would prefer a shorter dwell time DTl .
Processor 80 may determine a new decreased value for dwell time DTl based on times T2, T4, T5, and T6 that user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As one example, processor 80 may average the time between time Tl at the start of the dwell time DTl and each of times T2, T4, T5, and T6 corresponding to the recorded therapy adjustments to determine a new dwell time DTl. As another example, processor 80 may select the first time T2 that patient entered a therapy adjustment, and reduce the length of dwell time DTl based on time T2, e.g., by reducing DTl to be equal to T2-T1. In the example of FIG. 11, posture state PSl is associated with therapy level TLl and posture state PS2 is associated with therapy level TL3 throughout each occurrence of the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. In other examples, the therapy levels associated with posture states PSl and PS2 may change over time, i.e., new therapy levels may be associated with posture states PSl and PS2. FIG. 12 is a timing diagram illustrating a manual therapy adjustment following expiration of a dwell time. At time TO, it will be assumed that a first stable posture state has already been detected and is being used to control therapy delivery at a first therapy level, therapy level TLl, which has been associated with posture state PSl. At time Tl, a second, different posture state PS2 is detected. It will be assumed that a different therapy level, therapy level TL2, has previously been associated with this posture state PS2. Rather than immediately change the therapy level to therapy level TL2 in response to detection of posture state PS2, a dwell time is imposed. In particular, a timer/counter is started for a dwell time DTl that has been associated with this posture state change.
In the current example, dwell time DTl expires at time T2, as indicated by arrow 270. In response to the expiration of dwell time DTl, the level of therapy delivery automatically changes from therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl to therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, since patient 12 did not transition out of posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl in the example of FIG. 12. This change from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 272. However, in another example, the change may occur over time, such as using a ramp or some other therapy adjustment function. For example, any type of linear or non-linear ramp or exponential decay function may be used to achieve the target therapy level TL2. The type of ramp or decay function used in the system and/or the time over which the change to the second therapy level TL2 occurs may be programmable.
At T3, following expiration of dwell time DTl, the level of therapy delivery changes from therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3. This change may occur in response to a manual therapy adjustment received from a user, e.g., via external programmer 20. The therapy adjustment may be manual in the sense that the adjustment occurs in response to user input rather than automatically based on a therapy level previously associated with the new posture state, PS2. This change from therapy level TL2 to therapy level TL3 may occur as a step function, as shown by step function 274, although other types of transitions are also contemplated.
The user-initiated therapy change at T3 may indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred. For example, a user-initiated therapy change that occurs following dwell time DTl may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with the previous posture state, e.g., posture state PSl, for a longer period of time and transition to the therapy associated with a newly assumed posture state, e.g., posture state PS2, at a later time. In some examples, the therapy change received following dwell time DTl may also be examined to determine if a longer dwell time DTl is preferred.
Processor 80 of IMD 14 may determine if the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is consistent with changing the therapy in the direction of therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. In the example of FIG. 12, the previous posture state PSl is associated with a higher therapy level TLl than the therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2. Therefore, a user- initiated increase from therapy level TL2 may indicate that patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the previous posture state PS 1 for longer. Processor 80 may determine whether therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2. Processor 80 may also determine whether the therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is closer to therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl than therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2. If therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following expiration of dwell time DTl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is consistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. In some examples, processor 80 may also compare the therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated change in therapy to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl to determine how closely the user-initiated therapy change matches the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PS 1. If therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl was lower than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is inconsistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. As a result, processor 80 may determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl does not indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred. Processor 80 may also determine that the therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl does not indicate that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred if therapy level TL3 associated with the user-initiated therapy adjustment received following dwell time DTl is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 than the therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl.
If processor 80 determines that the user-initiated therapy adjustment is an indication that a longer dwell time DTl is preferred, processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl . For example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to a time longer than the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T3 when a user-initiated therapy adjustment returning the therapy close to or toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl occurred. In some examples, a second user-initiated therapy change may indicate when patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the newly-detected posture state PS2. For example, patient 12 or another user may adjust the therapy towards therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 at time T4. As described previously, therapy level TLl associated with posture state PSl is higher than therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2. A user-initiated therapy adjustment that decreases therapy from a higher therapy level TL3 to a lower therapy level TL4 may be consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may also compare therapy level TL4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment with therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 to determine how closely therapy level TL4 matches therapy level TL2, e.g., whether therapy TL4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2 to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. Processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl based on time T4 associated with the second therapy adjustment. For example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl equal to the time between time Tl associated with the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T4 associated with the second user-initiated therapy adjustment.
Processor 80 may also monitor and record user-initiated therapy adjustments each time a dwell time is initiated in response to a posture state transition. FIG. 13 is an example timing diagram illustrating a composite of user-initiated therapy adjustments recorded following various occurrences of dwell time DTl. As previously described, many possibilities exist for selecting which dwell time will be used in a given situation. In the example of FIG. 13, dwell time DTl may be specific to the particular posture state change that is occurring, i.e., the transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Although other techniques for selecting dwell time DTl are also contemplated. FIG. 13 is substantially similar to FIG. 12 but includes additional user-initiated therapy adjustments that occurred following other occurrences of dwell time DTl, i.e., after patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. As previously described, dwell time DTl is initiated at time Tl in response to patient 12 transitioning from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Dwell time DTl expires at time T2. Since, in the example illustrated in FIG. 13, patient 12 did not transition from posture state PS2 during dwell time DTl, therapy delivery according to therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 is initiated at time T2.
At times T3, T5, and T7, user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As illustrated in FIG. 13, each of therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 corresponding to times T3, T5, and T7, respectively, are higher than therapy level TL2. Therefore, each of these recorded therapy adjustments may be consistent with returning toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl. Each of times T3, T5, and T7 and corresponding therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time DTl . In other examples, processor 80 may examine how closely the adjusted therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 match therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PS 1 , e.g., whether each of therapy levels TL3, TL5, and TL7 is closer to therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl or therapy level TL2 associated with newly-assumed posture state PS2, to determine whether each of the recorded therapy adjustments indicates that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time DTl .
Processor 80 may determine a new increased value for dwell time DTl based on times T3, T5, and T7 that user-initiated therapy adjustments occurred. As one example, processor 80 may set dwell time DTl to a time longer than the time between time Tl when patient 12 transitioned from posture state PSl to posture state PS2 and time T7 when the last, i.e., farthest from time Tl, of the user-initiated therapy adjustments returning the therapy close to or toward therapy level TLl associated with previous posture state PSl occurred. Additionally, a second user-initiated therapy change may indicate when patient
12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the newly-detected posture state PS2. As previously described, patient 12 or another user may adjust the therapy close to or towards therapy level TL2 associated with posture state PS2 at time T4. Time T6 may indicate another user-initiated therapy adjustment indicating when patient 12 would like to receive the therapy associated with the newly-detected posture state PS2. The user-initiated therapy adjustment occurring at time T6 decreases therapy from a higher therapy level TL5 to a lower therapy level TL6, which may be consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may also determine how closely therapy level TL6 matches therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2, e.g., whether therapy level TL6 is closer to therapy level TL2 associated with the newly-assumed posture state PS2 or therapy level TLl associated with the previous posture state PSl, to determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment occurring at time T6 is consistent with the therapy adjustment from therapy level TLl to therapy level TL2 that automatically occurs when patient 12 transitions from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. Processor 80 may increase dwell time DTl based on times T4 and T6. For example, processor 80 may average times T4 and T6 to obtain an end time and set dwell time DTl to the time between Tl and the average of times T4 and T6. In the example of FIG. 13, posture state PSl is associated with therapy level TLl and posture state PS2 is associated with therapy level TL2 throughout each occurrence of the posture state transition from posture state PSl to posture state PS2. In other examples, the therapy levels associated with posture states PSl and PS2 may change over time, i.e., new therapy levels may be associated with posture states PSl and PS2. FIG. 14 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for updating a dwell time based on one or more user-initiated therapy adjustments. Although the description of FIG. 14 primarily refers to IMD 14 and its components (FIG. 4), the method of FIG. 14 is also applicable to other medical devices, such as IMD 26. Also, in some examples, the method of FIG. 14, or portions of the method, may be performed by an external programmer 20, such as patient programmer 30 or clinician programmer 60. Therapy adjustments may be automatic therapy adjustments applied by IMD 14 in response to different detected posture states, and subject to applicable dwell times, or manual therapy adjustments made by a user such as a patient 12 or a clinician.
Adjustments to dwell times may be automatic dwell time adjustments applied by IMD 14 or programmer 20 based on analysis of manual therapy adjustments made during or after dwell times. Alternatively, the dwell time adjustments may be semi- automatic. For example, programmer 20 may present a proposed dwell time adjustment to a user for approval, e.g., via a user interface associated with the programmer. The proposed dwell time adjustment that is presented to the user may be generated automatically by IMD 14 or programmer 20. As a further alternative, a clinician or other user may adjust dwell times via programmer 20 based on analysis of stored therapy adjustment data indicating patient therapy adjustments relative to applicable posture states and dwell times.
In each case, IMD 14 or programmer 20 may store therapy adjustment data for use in evaluating dwell time adjustments. The therapy adjustment data may include a variety of data stored by IMD 14 or programmer 20, such as data that indicates the timing of the therapy adjustments relative to dwell time and detected posture states, the parameters that were adjusted, the parameter values selected by the user (e.g., therapy level), or other pertinent therapy adjustment information. In some cases, in reviewing patient therapy adjustment data, IMD 14 or programmer 20 may require analysis of multiple therapy adjustments in order to adjust the dwell time. For example, a single patient therapy adjustment within a dwell time of after dwell time expiration may not trigger a dwell time adjustment. However, IMD 14 or programmer 20 may automatically adjust a dwell time to be shorter if N or more patient therapy adjustments are detected within the dwell time, where N is a threshold value triggering dwell time adjustment, and the patient therapy adjustments are consistent with adjustment close to or toward therapy settings, e.g., a therapy level, of the newly detected posture state.
Similarly, IMD 14 or programmer 20 may automatically adjust a dwell time to be longer if N or more patient therapy adjustments are detected after expiration of the dwell time, and the patient therapy adjustments are consistent with adjustment close to or toward therapy settings of a previously detected stable posture. The threshold value N may be the same for all or some dwell times, or different for different dwell times associated with different posture states or posture state transitions. The number of patient therapy adjustments may refer to the number of patient therapy adjustments associated with separate posture state transitions.
For example, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may be configured such that N patient therapy adjustments during a single posture state transition does not trigger dwell time adjustment. Rather, at least one patient therapy adjustment in N separate instances of the posture state transition, stable posture state or newly detected posture state may be required to impose a dwell time adjustment for that posture state transition, stable posture state or newly detected posture state.
As an illustration, assuming N=3, if patient 12 enters a therapy adjustment once during the dwell time for a posture state transition from lying back to lying left, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 does not adjust the dwell time. Similarly, if patient 12 enters four therapy adjustments during the dwell time for a single posture state transition from lying back to lying left, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 does not adjust the dwell time. However, if IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 determines that patient 12 has entered a therapy adjustment in each of four different instances of the same posture state transition, e.g., lying back to lying left, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 proceeds to adjust the dwell time.
Requiring a minimum number of therapy adjustments in a minimum number of instances of a posture state transition may have a damping effect on the control loop so that dwell time is not immediately and repeatedly adjusted in response to a single therapy adjustment or a few therapy adjustments for a given posture state. Different or similar threshold values N may be used for different dwell times and posture state transitions. As mentioned above, the actual dwell time adjustment made by IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may be administered in a variety of different ways. If at least N therapy adjustments are detected during the dwell time or after the dwell time for a minimum number of instances of a particular posture state transition, the dwell time for that posture state transition may be adjusted based on the timing of the therapy adjustments. If a dwell time is shortened, it may be shortened to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to the time of the earliest therapy adjustment. Alternatively, the dwell time may be shortened to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to an average time of the multiple therapy adjustments. If a dwell time is lengthened, it may be increased to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to the time of the latest therapy patient adjustment. Alternatively, the dwell time may be increased to a length that extends from the start of the dwell time to an average time of the multiple patient therapy adjustments.
In some cases, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may maintain one or more counters that track the number of patient therapy adjustments for multiple instances of the different posture transitions, and increase or reduce dwell times based on comparison of the counter values to applicable threshold values for pertinent posture state transitions. If the number of patient therapy adjustments during or after dwell time exceeds the threshold number, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 automatically adjusts the dwell time, e.g., as described above. As a further example, in some cases, IMD 14 and/or programmer 20 may adjust the dwell time in fixed increments, progressively increasing or decreasing the dwell time, as applicable, based on the number of patient therapy adjustments indicated by the counter value, or calculating an amount of increase or decrease as a function of the counter value.
In the example of FIG. 14, posture state module 86, e.g., in conjunction with processor 80, may detect a posture state transition (280). In response to the detected posture state transition, dwell time module 89 may initiate a dwell time (282).
Processor 80 may record user-initiated therapy adjustments during and following the dwell time (284). User-initiated therapy adjustments occurring during or following the dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shorter or longer dwell time.
Processor 80 may identify whether a user-initiated therapy adjustment occurred during the dwell time (286). If a user-initiated therapy adjustment occurred during the dwell time, processor 80 may determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new posture state that patient 12 recently transitioned into (288). A therapy adjustment close to or toward the therapy associated with the new posture state may indicate that patient 12 would prefer to receive the therapy associated with the new posture state at an earlier time. For example, a therapy adjustment close to or toward a therapy associated with a new posture state may be a therapy adjustment that changes an amplitude level close to or toward an amplitude level of the therapy associated with the new posture state. In response to determination 286 and 288, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time, e.g., the dwell time associated with the specific posture state transition, if the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new posture state (290). Although FIG 14 illustrates decreasing dwell time (290) in response to a single therapy adjustment during the dwell time for a posture state transition (286), as described above, decreasing dwell time may require patient adjustments in multiple instances of the posture state transition, i.e., a threshold number N of patient adjustments.
If a user-initiated therapy adjustment did not occur during the dwell time (286) or the user-initiated therapy adjustment that occurred during the dwell time is not consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new posture state (288), processor 80 may determine whether a therapy adjustment occurred following the dwell time (292). If a user-initiated therapy adjustment did occur following the dwell time, processor 80 may determine whether the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with transitioning back close to or toward the therapy associated with the previous posture state that patient 12 recently transitioned from (294). A user-initiated therapy adjustment that transitions therapy delivery back close to or toward the therapy associated with the previous posture state may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a longer dwell time. Therefore, if the user-initiated therapy adjustment is consistent with a transition back close to or toward the therapy associated with the previous posture state, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time, e.g., the dwell time associated with the specific posture state transition (296). Dwell time module 89 and/or memory 82 may store the updated dwell time value for use in delivery of posture- responsive therapy for subsequent posture state transitions by patient 12. FIGS. 15-19 illustrate examples of the application of a search timer and stability timer to associate patient therapy adjustments with posture states. If a patient therapy adjustment is associated with a posture state, it may be used to evaluate whether a dwell time for the posture state should be adjusted. FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 when patient 12 remains in one posture state. In some examples, IMD 14 must be able to correctly associate each therapy adjustment with a therapy parameter to the intended posture state of patient 12 when the therapy adjustment was made. For example, patient 12 may make therapy adjustments to customize the therapy either after patient 12 moves to a different posture state or in anticipation of the next posture state. IMD 14 may employ posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 to track therapy adjustments and the current posture state of patient 12. Although IMD 14 may associate therapy adjustments of any therapy parameter to a posture state, some examples of IMD 14 may only allow the association of amplitude changes. In this manner, patient 12 may change different therapy parameters such as pulse width, pulse rate, or electrode configuration, but IMD 14 will not store these therapy adjustments as being associated to any posture state in some examples.
Posture search timer 550 has a search period that is a set amount of time that patient 12 has from the time the therapy adjustment is made, when posture search timer 550 starts, to when the final posture state must begin, prior to the expiration of the search period. In other words, in this example, the patient therapy adjustment will not be associated with a posture state entered after the search period has expired. In addition, posture stability timer 552 has a stability period that is a set amount of time that patient 12 must remain within the final posture state for the therapy adjustment made to be associated with the final posture state. Posture stability timer 552 restarts at any time that patient 12 changes posture states. In order to associate a therapy adjustment with a posture state, the stability timer for the posture state must start before the end of the search period, and the posture state must not change during the stability period. Therefore, the search period and stability period must overlap for the therapy adjustment to be associated with a posture state not currently occupied by patient 12 when the therapy adjustment was made.
In the example of FIG. 15, patient 12 made a therapy adjustment to one of the therapy parameters, such as voltage or current amplitude, at time T0. Therefore, posture search timer 550 starts at To and runs for a predetermined search period until time T1. When the therapy adjustment is made, posture stability timer 552 also starts at time To in the current posture state of patient 12 and runs for the stability period. In the example of FIG. 15, the stability period is the same as the search period. Since patient 12 has not changed to any different posture states between times To and T1, the stability period also ends at Ti. The therapy adjustment made by patient 12 at time To is associated with the posture state sensed between times To and Ti because both the search period and stability period overlap. In the example of FIG. 15, posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 552 may not be needed, but their purpose in some example implementations may become clearer in the following examples.
The search period of posture search timer 550 may be of any time duration desired by a device manufacturer, and the clinician may or may not be permitted to set the search period to a desired value or within a predetermined search range. Generally, the search period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 30 minutes, but it may be set to any time desired, including a time that is outside of that range. More specifically, the search period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 5 minutes, or more preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes in order to provide a reasonable amount of time for patient 12 to be situated in the final desired posture state. In some examples, and as described in the examples of FIGS. 15-19, the search period is approximately 3 minutes. In other cases, shorter search periods may be used, e.g., approximately 1 second to 60 seconds, or approximately 5 seconds to 20 seconds.
In addition, the stability period of posture stability timer 552 may be of any time duration desired by the manufacturer or clinician, where the clinician may or may not be permitted to set the stability period. Generally, the stability period is between approximately 30 seconds and 30 minutes, but it may be set to any time desired, including times outside of that range. More specifically, the stability period may be between approximately 30 seconds and 5 minutes, and more preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes, in order to ensure that patient 12 is situated in the final desired posture state for a reasonable amount of time and that the final posture state is not just some transitional or interim posture state. In some examples, and as described in the examples of FIGS. 15-19, the stability period is approximately 3 minutes. Although the search period and stability period may have the same duration, they may be different in other examples. In other cases, shorter stability periods may be used, e.g., approximately 1 second to 60 seconds, or approximately 5 seconds to 20 seconds. As described herein, associating therapy adjustments with intended posture states may allow a processor to review therapy adjustments made by patient 12 while assuming, or transitioning to, each posture state. These adjustments may be used to determine whether to modify a dwell time, e.g., decrease a dwell time for a specified posture state transition.
FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 554 and posture stability timer 556 with one change in posture state. As shown in FIG. 16, patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment for the next posture state that patient 12 does not currently occupy. In other words, patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment that the patient may believe is desirable for a given posture in anticipation of transitioning to that posture on an imminent or near-term basis. Posture search timer 554 and posture stability timer 556 start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state occupied at time To. At time T1, patient 12 changes to a second posture state that is different than the initial posture state occupied at time T0. Therefore, posture stability timer 556 restarts at time T1, with the change to the new posture state, still within the search duration of posture search timer 554.
In some implementations, patient therapy adjustments received during the search period restart the search period. As a result, a series of patient therapy adjustments that are entered closely in time are, in effect, clustered together such that intermediate adjustments are not counted for the posture state. Instead, the last adjustment in a series of closely spaced (in time) adjustments is associated with the posture state to represent the final adjustment that brought the parameter to a level or value deemed appropriate by the patient 12 for the given posture state. If the search period is three minutes, for example, and the patient 12 makes four adjustments in voltage amplitude within three minutes of one another, e.g., 4.6 volts to 4.8 volts, 4.8 volts to 5.0 volts, 5.0 volts to 5.1 volts, 5.1 volts to 5.3 volts, then the final adjustment value of 5.3 volts may be associated with the posture state. Each time a new adjustment is entered within the search period, the search period is reset. Once the final adjustment is made, however, if there are no further adjustments for another three minutes, and the stability period is satisfied for the detected posture state, then the final adjustment is associated with the posture state. Clustering of a number of patient therapy adjustments can be useful in order to present a series of closely timed adjustments as a single programming intervention event.
Treatment of clustered adjustments as a single programming intervention event may be especially appropriate if the values of the adjustments are also close to one another. Time T2 indicates the end of posture search timer 554. Consequently, the only posture state that processor 80 of IMD 14 will associate with the therapy adjustment is the second posture state as long as the second posture state satisfies the stability period of posture stability timer 556, i.e., the patient occupies the second posture state for the stability period. At time T3, patient 12 is still in the second posture when the stability period ends, and the therapy adjustment is associated then to the second posture state because the stability period overlapped with the search period.
It should be noted that patient 12 may make additional therapy adjustments within the search period. If this occurs, any previous therapy adjustments made before the search period or stability period is completed are not associated to any posture state. Therefore, both the search period and stability period must lapse, i.e., expire, in order for a therapy adjustment to be associated with a posture state. However, in some examples, IMD 14 may allow therapy adjustments to be associated with posture states as long as the search period has lapsed or no different posture state was sensed during the search period.
FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example posture search timer 550 and posture stability timer 560 with two changes in posture states. As shown in FIG. 17, patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment but is engaged in an interim posture state before settling into the final posture state. Posture search timer 558 and posture stability timer 560 both start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state engaged at time T0.
At time T1, patient 12 changes to a second posture state, or an interim posture state, that is different than the initial posture state engaged at time To. Therefore, posture stability timer 560 restarts at time T1, still within the search duration of posture search timer 558. At time T2, patient 12 changes to a third posture state, and again posture stability timer 560 restarts. Time T3 indicates the end of posture search timer 558, so the only posture state that processor 80 of IMD 14 will associate with the therapy adjustment is the third posture state begun at time T2 as long as the third posture state satisfies the stability period of posture stability timer 560. At time T4, patient 12 is still in the third posture when the stability period ends, and the therapy adjustment is associated then to the third and final posture state because the stability period of the third posture state overlapped with the search period. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram illustrating example search timer 562 and posture stability timer 564 with the last posture state change occurring outside of the posture search timer. As shown in FIG. 18, patient 12 makes an anticipatory therapy adjustment but is engaged in an interim posture state too long before settling into the final posture state for the therapy adjustment to be associated with any posture state. Posture search timer 562 and posture stability timer 564 both start at time To when patient 12 makes a therapy adjustment in a current posture state engaged at time To. At time T1, patient 12 changes to a second posture state, or an interim posture state, that is different than the initial posture state engaged at time To. Therefore, posture stability timer 564 restarts at time T1, still within the search duration of posture search timer 562. However, the search timer expires at time T2, before patient 12 changes to a third posture state at time T3, when posture stability timer 564 again restarts. The stability period for the third posture state then expires at time T4. Since the third posture state did not start before the search period expired at time T2, the search period and stability period do not overlap and the therapy adjustment from time To is not associated to any posture state. In other examples, therapy adjustments may still be associated with the posture state occupied at time To when the search period and last stability period do not overlap.
The following is a further illustration of the example described in FIG. 18 to put the example in the context of an example patient scenario. Patient 12 may be engaged in the upright posture state when patient 12 makes the therapy adjustment at time T0. In this example, the search duration is three minutes and the stability duration is also three minutes. After two minutes, or at time T1, patient 12 transitions to the lying left posture to cause processor 80 of IMD 14 to restart posture stability timer 560. If patient 12 remains within the lying left posture for the full three minutes of the stability duration, then the therapy adjustment would be associated with the lying left posture. However, patient 12 leaves the lying left posture after only two minutes, or at time T3, outside of the search duration. At this point the therapy amplitude made at time T0, will not be associated for the next posture state of patient 12. Therefore, the next posture state may be the lying back posture state. Once IMD 14 senses the lying back posture state, IMD 14 may change therapy according to the therapy parameters associated with the lying back posture because IMD 14 is operating in the automatic posture state-responsive mode. No new associations with the therapy adjustment would be made in the example of FIG. 18.
FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating an example method for associating a received therapy adjustment with a posture state. Although the example of FIG. 17 will be described with respect to patient programmer 30 and IMD 14, the technique may be employed in any external programmer 20 and IMD or other computing device. As shown in FIG. 17, user interface 106 receives the therapy adjustment from patient 12 (566) and processor 80 of IMD 14 immediately starts the posture search timer (568) and the posture stability timer (570). If the posture state of patient 12 does not change (572), processor 80 checks to determine if the stability period has expired (576). If the stability period has not expired (576), processor 80 continues to sense for a posture state change (572). If the stability period has expired (576), processor 80 uses the final posture state, i.e., the currently sensed posture state, to select therapy parameters to deliver therapy (582). Processor 80 then associates the therapy adjustment with the final posture state and counts the therapy adjustment for that posture state (584).
If processor 80 senses a posture state change (572), processor 80 determines if the search period has expired (574). If the search period has not expired (574), then processor 80 restarts the posture stability timer (570). If the search period has expired (574), then processor 80 automatically delivers posture state -responsive therapy to patient 12 according to the current posture state (578). Processor 80 does not associate the patient therapy adjustment with the final posture state because the search period did not overlap with the stability period (580).
In some examples, as an alternative, a posture stability timer may be employed without the use of a posture search timer. As described with respect to posture stability timer 560, the posture stability timer may be started after a therapy adjustment and reset each time patient 12 changes posture states prior to expiration of the posture stability timer. When the posture stability timer 560 expires, the therapy adjustment may be associated with the posture state that patient 12 is occupying at that time. In this manner, the therapy adjustment may be associated with the first stable posture state, i.e., the first posture state that remains stable for the duration of the posture stability timer, after the therapy adjustment, regardless of the amount of time that has past since the therapy adjustment. Hence, in some implementations, processor 80 may apply only a stability timer without a search timer.
As described with respect to FIGS. 15-19, patient 12 may make an anticipatory therapy adjustment intended for posture state in anticipation of transitioning to that posture state on an imminent or near-term basis. Although the therapy adjustment occurs before patient 12 actually transitions to the new posture state for which the therapy adjustment is intended, the therapy adjustment may be associated with the new, intended posture state upon expiration of the posture search and stability timers. As described with respect to the examples of FIGS. 16 and 17, the therapy adjustment may be associated with the new, intended posture state if the search period does not expire prior to entering the new, intended posture state and the posture stability requirement is satisfied for the new, intended posture state. In some examples, anticipatory therapy adjustments may also be used to update dwell time values.
Using association logic based on a search timer and/or stability timer as described in this disclosure, a processor can detect a patient therapy adjustment that is associated with a posture state, but is entered and detected before detection of the posture state, and before commencement of the dwell time for the posture state. This type of anticipatory therapy adjustment prior to transitioning to the posture state for which the therapy adjustment is intended and prior to initiating a corresponding dwell time may indicate that patient 12 would prefer a shortened dwell time. For example, a patient-initiated therapy adjustment in anticipation of transitioning to a posture state may indicate that the patient would prefer to receive the therapy associated with that posture state as soon as possible. Shortening the dwell time associated with the posture state or the specific posture state transition that patient 12 undergoes may allow patient 12 to receive the therapy associated with the new posture state sooner.
Processor 80 may decrease the dwell time associated with the new, intended posture state or the specific posture state transition that patient 12 undergoes from a first posture state to the new, intended posture state for subsequent detections of the posture state or posture state transition. In some examples, processor 80 may monitor the number of anticipatory therapy adjustments associated with a posture and/or posture state transition and decrease the dwell time associated with the posture or posture state transition based on the number of anticipatory therapy adjustments associated with the posture or posture state transition, e.g., over multiple occurrences of the posture state transition.
As one example, processor 80 may incrementally decrease the dwell time associated with the posture state or posture state transition. For example, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time by a specified amount, e.g., percentage, each time an anticipatory therapy adjustment is associated with the posture state or posture state transition. As another example, processor 80 may decrease the dwell time after a threshold number of anticipatory therapy adjustments are associated with the posture or posture state transition. As yet another example, processor 80 may set the dwell time for the posture or posture state transition to approximately zero, e.g., after one or a threshold number of anticipatory therapy adjustments are associated with the posture or posture state transition.
In some examples, processor 80 may also examine whether the anticipatory therapy adjustment received prior to transitioning to the new, intended posture state and initiating a corresponding dwell time is consistent with transitioning close to or toward a therapy associated with the new, intended posture state, as described in further detail with respect to FIGS. 10-14. In some examples, the posture search and stability timers described with respect to FIGS. 15-19 may be used to associate therapy adjustments received during and after the dwell time with the appropriate posture state, e.g., in addition to associating anticipatory therapy adjustments received prior to the dwell time with the intended posture state.
Various aspects of the techniques described in this disclosure may be implemented within an IMD, an external programmer, or a combination of both. Moreover, in some aspects, information may be processed by the IMD, programmer or a dedicated processing device such as a network server. For example, posture state information may be stored in raw form in an IMD and retrieved from the IMD by an external programmer or other external device for evaluation of dwell time adjustments. Alternatively, the IMD may process the posture state information at least partially for retrieval by an external device. An IMD or programmer may be configured to adjust dwell time automatically or semi-automatically. The particular implementations described in this disclosure are presented for purposes of illustration and without limitation as to the techniques broadly described in this disclosure. The techniques described in this disclosure may be implemented, at least in part, in hardware, software, firmware or any combination thereof. For example, various aspects of the techniques may be implemented within one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or any other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuitry, as well as any combinations of such components, embodied in programmers, such as physician or patient programmers, stimulators, or other devices. The term "processor" or "processing circuitry" may generally refer to any of the foregoing logic circuitry, alone or in combination with other logic circuitry, or any other equivalent circuitry.
When implemented in software, the functionality ascribed to the systems and devices described in this disclosure may be embodied as instructions on a computer- readable medium such as random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), FLASH memory, magnetic media, optical media, or the like. The instructions may be executed to support one or more aspects of the functionality described in this disclosure.
In addition, it should be noted that the systems described herein may not be limited to treatment of a human patient. In alternative embodiments, these systems may be implemented in non-human patients, e.g., primates, canines, equines, pigs, and felines. These animals may undergo clinical or research therapies that my benefit from the subject matter of this disclosure.
Many examples of the disclosure have been described. Various modifications may be made without departing from the scope of the claims. These and other examples are within the scope of the following claims.

Claims

CLAIMS:
1. A method comprising: delivering therapy to a patient; detecting a posture state transition of a patient; upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition; detecting a patient adjustment of the therapy; and adjusting the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein adjusting the dwell time comprises adjusting the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time.
3. The method of claim 1 , wherein adjusting the dwell time comprises adjusting the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected prior to the dwell time.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein adjusting the dwell time comprises adjusting the dwell time if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold.
5. The method of claim 2, further comprising reducing the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein reducing comprises reducing the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
7. The method of claim 2, further comprising increasing the dwell time if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein increasing comprises increasing the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
9. The method of claim 1 , further comprising determining whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition, wherein adjusting the dwell time comprises adjusting the dwell time based on the patient adjustment and the determination of whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the posture state transition comprises a transition from a first posture state to a second posture state, and wherein each of the first and second posture states comprises at least one of a posture or a combination of a posture and an activity level.
11. The method of claim 1 , further comprising adjusting the therapy based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, wherein at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions.
12. The method of claim 11 , wherein adjusting the dwell time comprises adjusting different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient adjustments associated with the respective dwell times.
13. The method of claim 1, further comprising delivering the therapy from an implantable medical device, wherein the therapy comprises electrical stimulation therapy.
14. A medical device comprising: a posture state module that detects a posture state transition of a patient; a therapy module that delivers therapy to a patient; and a processor that, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusts the therapy based on the posture state transition, detects a patient adjustment of the therapy, and adjusts the dwell time based on the therapy adjustment.
15. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the processor adjusts the therapy if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time.
16. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the processor adjusts the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected prior to the dwell time.
17. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the processor adjusts the dwell time if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold.
18. The medical device of claim 15, wherein the processor reduces the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time.
19. The medical device of claim 18, wherein the processor reduces the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
20. The medical device of claim 15, wherein the processor increases the dwell time if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time.
21. The medical device of claim 20, wherein the processor increases the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
22. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the processor determines whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition, and adjusts the dwell time based on the therapy adjustment and the determination of whether the patient adjustment is consistent with the adjustment of therapy based on the posture state transition.
23. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the posture state transition comprises a transition from a first posture state to a second posture state, and wherein each of the first and second posture states comprises at least one of a posture or a combination of a posture and an activity level.
24. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the processor adjusts the therapy based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, wherein at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions.
25. The medical device of claim 24, wherein the processor adjusts different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient adjustments associated with the respective dwell times.
26. The medical device of claim 14, wherein the medical device comprises an implantable medical device, and the therapy comprises electrical stimulation therapy.
27. A medical system comprising: a medical device that detects a posture state transition of a patient, and delivers therapy to a patient upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition; an external programmer that receives a patient adjustment of the therapy; and a processor that adjusts the dwell time based on the patient adjustment.
28. The medical system of claim 27, if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time.
29. The medical system of claim 27, wherein the processor adjusts the therapy if the patient adjustment is detected prior to the dwell time.
30. The medical system of claim 27, wherein the processor adjusts the dwell time if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold.
31. The medical system of claim 30, wherein the processor reduces the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time, and wherein the processor reduces the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
32. The medical system of claim 30, wherein the processor increases the dwell time if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time, and wherein the processor increases the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
33. The medical system of claim 27, wherein the processor adjusts the therapy based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, wherein at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions.
34. The medical system of claim 33, wherein the processor adjusts different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient adjustments associated with the respective dwell times.
35. The medical device of claim 27, wherein the medical device comprises an implantable medical device, and the therapy comprises electrical stimulation therapy, the medical system further comprising a telemetry interface that supports communication between the external programmer and the implantable medical device.
36. The medical device of claim 27, wherein the processor resides within the external programmer.
37. The medical device of claim 27, wherein the processor resides within the medical device.
38. A medical device comprising: means for delivering therapy to a patient; means for detecting a posture state transition of a patient; means for, upon expiration of a dwell time for the posture state transition, adjusting the therapy based on the posture state transition; means for detecting a patient adjustment of the therapy; and means for adjusting the dwell time based on the therapy adjustment.
39. The medical device of claim 38, wherein the means for adjusting the dwell time comprises means for adjusting the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during or after the dwell time.
40. The medical device of claim 38, wherein the means for adjusting the dwell time comprises means for adjusting the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected prior to the dwell time.
41. The medical device of claim 38, wherein the means for adjusting the dwell time comprises means for adjusting the dwell time if a number of patient adjustments detected during multiple instances of the posture state transition exceeds a threshold.
42. The medical device of claim 41 , further comprising means for reducing the dwell time if the patient adjustment is detected during the dwell time, wherein the means for reducing comprises means for reducing the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
43. The medical device of claim 41 , further comprising means for increasing the dwell time if the patient therapy adjustment is detected after the dwell time, wherein the means for increasing comprises means for increasing the dwell time based on timing of the patient adjustment.
44. The medical device of claim 38, further comprising means for adjusting the therapy based on a plurality of different posture state transitions upon expiration of dwell times for the respective posture state transitions, wherein at least some of the dwell times are different for different posture state transitions, and wherein the means for adjusting the dwell time comprises means for adjusting different dwell times for different posture state transitions based on patient adjustments associated with the respective dwell times.
45. The medical device of claim 38, further comprising delivering the therapy from an implantable medical device, wherein the therapy comprises electrical stimulation therapy.
PCT/US2009/049184 2008-07-11 2009-06-30 Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy WO2010005828A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US8004908P 2008-07-11 2008-07-11
US61/080,049 2008-07-11
US12/433,815 2009-04-30
US12/433,815 US8219206B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-04-30 Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010005828A2 true WO2010005828A2 (en) 2010-01-14
WO2010005828A3 WO2010005828A3 (en) 2010-05-27

Family

ID=41505797

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2009/048676 WO2010005800A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-25 Posture state detection using selectable system control parameters
PCT/US2009/048686 WO2010005802A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-25 Posture state classification for a medical device
PCT/US2009/048852 WO2010005809A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-26 Posture state responsive therapy delivery using dwell times
PCT/US2009/049071 WO2010005822A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-29 Blended posture state classification and therapy delivery
PCT/US2009/048995 WO2010005816A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-29 Posture state classification for a medical device
PCT/US2009/049184 WO2010005828A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-30 Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy

Family Applications Before (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2009/048676 WO2010005800A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-25 Posture state detection using selectable system control parameters
PCT/US2009/048686 WO2010005802A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-25 Posture state classification for a medical device
PCT/US2009/048852 WO2010005809A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-26 Posture state responsive therapy delivery using dwell times
PCT/US2009/049071 WO2010005822A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-29 Blended posture state classification and therapy delivery
PCT/US2009/048995 WO2010005816A2 (en) 2008-07-11 2009-06-29 Posture state classification for a medical device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (9) US9776008B2 (en)
EP (5) EP2656787B1 (en)
CN (2) CN102089032B (en)
WO (6) WO2010005800A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (186)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8396565B2 (en) * 2003-09-15 2013-03-12 Medtronic, Inc. Automatic therapy adjustments
US7957809B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2011-06-07 Medtronic, Inc. Closed-loop therapy adjustment
US8200341B2 (en) 2007-02-07 2012-06-12 Cameron Health, Inc. Sensing vector selection in a cardiac stimulus device with postural assessment
US11330988B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2022-05-17 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn system for measuring continuous non-invasive blood pressure (cNIBP)
US11607152B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2023-03-21 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Optical sensors for use in vital sign monitoring
US8602997B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2013-12-10 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn system for measuring continuous non-invasive blood pressure (cNIBP)
WO2008154643A1 (en) 2007-06-12 2008-12-18 Triage Wireless, Inc. Vital sign monitor for measuring blood pressure using optical, electrical, and pressure waveforms
US8382667B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2013-02-26 Flint Hills Scientific, Llc Detecting, quantifying, and/or classifying seizures using multimodal data
US8337404B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2012-12-25 Flint Hills Scientific, Llc Detecting, quantifying, and/or classifying seizures using multimodal data
US8571643B2 (en) 2010-09-16 2013-10-29 Flint Hills Scientific, Llc Detecting or validating a detection of a state change from a template of heart rate derivative shape or heart beat wave complex
US8209028B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2012-06-26 Medtronic, Inc. Objectification of posture state-responsive therapy based on patient therapy adjustments
US8437861B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2013-05-07 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state redefinition based on posture data and therapy adjustments
US8326420B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2012-12-04 Medtronic, Inc. Associating therapy adjustments with posture states using stability timers
US8583252B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2013-11-12 Medtronic, Inc. Patient interaction with posture-responsive therapy
US9776008B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2017-10-03 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state responsive therapy delivery using dwell times
US8708934B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2014-04-29 Medtronic, Inc. Reorientation of patient posture states for posture-responsive therapy
US9440084B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2016-09-13 Medtronic, Inc. Programming posture responsive therapy
US8504150B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2013-08-06 Medtronic, Inc. Associating therapy adjustments with posture states using a stability timer
US9050471B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2015-06-09 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state display on medical device user interface
US8280517B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2012-10-02 Medtronic, Inc. Automatic validation techniques for validating operation of medical devices
US9026223B2 (en) 2009-04-30 2015-05-05 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy system including multiple posture sensors
US9327070B2 (en) * 2009-04-30 2016-05-03 Medtronic, Inc. Medical device therapy based on posture and timing
US8175720B2 (en) 2009-04-30 2012-05-08 Medtronic, Inc. Posture-responsive therapy control based on patient input
US11896350B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2024-02-13 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Cable system for generating signals for detecting motion and measuring vital signs
US8180440B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2012-05-15 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Alarm system that processes both motion and vital signs using specific heuristic rules and thresholds
US8475370B2 (en) 2009-05-20 2013-07-02 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Method for measuring patient motion, activity level, and posture along with PTT-based blood pressure
US10085657B2 (en) 2009-06-17 2018-10-02 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn pulse oximeter
US20110015503A1 (en) * 2009-07-17 2011-01-20 WAVi Medical apparatus for collecting patient electroencephalogram (eeg) data
US8491504B2 (en) * 2009-08-04 2013-07-23 University Of South Carolina Devices and methods for monitoring sit to stand transfers
US10123722B2 (en) 2009-09-14 2018-11-13 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiration rate
US11253169B2 (en) 2009-09-14 2022-02-22 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiration rate
US10420476B2 (en) * 2009-09-15 2019-09-24 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US10806351B2 (en) 2009-09-15 2020-10-20 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US8321004B2 (en) 2009-09-15 2012-11-27 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US10213159B2 (en) 2010-03-10 2019-02-26 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US8527038B2 (en) 2009-09-15 2013-09-03 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US8364250B2 (en) 2009-09-15 2013-01-29 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn vital sign monitor
US8784323B2 (en) * 2009-11-20 2014-07-22 Pacesetter, Inc. Methods and systems that use implanted posture sensor to monitor pulmonary edema
US20110161136A1 (en) * 2009-11-25 2011-06-30 Patrick Faith Customer mapping using mobile device with an accelerometer
US9357949B2 (en) 2010-01-08 2016-06-07 Medtronic, Inc. User interface that displays medical therapy and posture data
US8579834B2 (en) 2010-01-08 2013-11-12 Medtronic, Inc. Display of detected patient posture state
US9956418B2 (en) 2010-01-08 2018-05-01 Medtronic, Inc. Graphical manipulation of posture zones for posture-responsive therapy
US8388555B2 (en) * 2010-01-08 2013-03-05 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state classification for a medical device
CN102753095B (en) * 2010-02-11 2016-02-03 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 For determining the method and apparatus of breath signal
WO2011113070A1 (en) * 2010-03-07 2011-09-15 Centauri Medical, INC. Systems, devices and methods for preventing, detecting, and treating pressure-induced ischemia, pressure ulcers, and other conditions
JP5515875B2 (en) * 2010-03-08 2014-06-11 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Fall detection device, fall detection method
US9339209B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2016-05-17 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US8747330B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2014-06-10 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US9173594B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2015-11-03 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US8979765B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2015-03-17 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US8888700B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2014-11-18 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US9173593B2 (en) 2010-04-19 2015-11-03 Sotera Wireless, Inc. Body-worn monitor for measuring respiratory rate
US8649871B2 (en) 2010-04-29 2014-02-11 Cyberonics, Inc. Validity test adaptive constraint modification for cardiac data used for detection of state changes
US8562536B2 (en) 2010-04-29 2013-10-22 Flint Hills Scientific, Llc Algorithm for detecting a seizure from cardiac data
US8831732B2 (en) 2010-04-29 2014-09-09 Cyberonics, Inc. Method, apparatus and system for validating and quantifying cardiac beat data quality
US9566441B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2017-02-14 Medtronic, Inc. Detecting posture sensor signal shift or drift in medical devices
WO2011163367A1 (en) * 2010-06-22 2011-12-29 Mcgregor Stephen J Method of monitoring human body movement
US8641646B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2014-02-04 Cyberonics, Inc. Seizure detection using coordinate data
JP5710767B2 (en) 2010-09-28 2015-04-30 マシモ コーポレイション Depth of consciousness monitor including oximeter
US8684921B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2014-04-01 Flint Hills Scientific Llc Detecting, assessing and managing epilepsy using a multi-variate, metric-based classification analysis
US8433419B2 (en) 2010-10-13 2013-04-30 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling neurostimulation according to physical state
SG10201510693UA (en) 2010-12-28 2016-01-28 Sotera Wireless Inc Body-worn system for continous, noninvasive measurement of cardiac output, stroke volume, cardiac power, and blood pressure
CN103491860B (en) 2011-02-18 2016-10-19 索泰拉无线公司 For measuring the optical pickocff of physiological property
SG192836A1 (en) 2011-02-18 2013-09-30 Sotera Wireless Inc Modular wrist-worn processor for patient monitoring
US9504390B2 (en) 2011-03-04 2016-11-29 Globalfoundries Inc. Detecting, assessing and managing a risk of death in epilepsy
US8818516B2 (en) 2011-03-10 2014-08-26 Biotronik Se & Co. Kg Posture-dependent stimulation for implantable stimulators
US9498162B2 (en) 2011-04-25 2016-11-22 Cyberonics, Inc. Identifying seizures using heart data from two or more windows
US10448889B2 (en) 2011-04-29 2019-10-22 Medtronic, Inc. Determining nerve location relative to electrodes
US9789307B2 (en) 2011-04-29 2017-10-17 Medtronic, Inc. Dual prophylactic and abortive electrical stimulation
US9649494B2 (en) 2011-04-29 2017-05-16 Medtronic, Inc. Electrical stimulation therapy based on head position
US9402550B2 (en) 2011-04-29 2016-08-02 Cybertronics, Inc. Dynamic heart rate threshold for neurological event detection
US9549677B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2017-01-24 Flint Hills Scientific, L.L.C. Seizure detection methods, apparatus, and systems using a wavelet transform maximum modulus algorithm
WO2013057622A1 (en) * 2011-10-17 2013-04-25 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. A device for monitoring a user and a method for calibrating the device
US8634912B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2014-01-21 Pacesetter, Inc. Dual-chamber leadless intra-cardiac medical device with intra-cardiac extension
US8781605B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2014-07-15 Pacesetter, Inc. Unitary dual-chamber leadless intra-cardiac medical device and method of implanting same
US9017341B2 (en) 2011-10-31 2015-04-28 Pacesetter, Inc. Multi-piece dual-chamber leadless intra-cardiac medical device and method of implanting same
US8700181B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2014-04-15 Pacesetter, Inc. Single-chamber leadless intra-cardiac medical device with dual-chamber functionality and shaped stabilization intra-cardiac extension
US9265436B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2016-02-23 Pacesetter, Inc. Leadless intra-cardiac medical device with built-in telemetry system
US8996109B2 (en) 2012-01-17 2015-03-31 Pacesetter, Inc. Leadless intra-cardiac medical device with dual chamber sensing through electrical and/or mechanical sensing
KR20140099539A (en) * 2011-12-07 2014-08-12 액세스 비지니스 그룹 인터내셔날 엘엘씨 Behavior tracking and modification system
EP2787917A1 (en) 2011-12-09 2014-10-15 Brainlab AG Method for determining contact position parameters of a joint connecting two bones
US20130165819A1 (en) * 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for controlling radio frequency scanning attributes of an implantable medical device
WO2013136264A1 (en) 2012-03-15 2013-09-19 Koninklijke Philips N.V. An apparatus and method for determining the posture of a user
US9907959B2 (en) 2012-04-12 2018-03-06 Medtronic, Inc. Velocity detection for posture-responsive therapy
US10448839B2 (en) 2012-04-23 2019-10-22 Livanova Usa, Inc. Methods, systems and apparatuses for detecting increased risk of sudden death
US9737719B2 (en) 2012-04-26 2017-08-22 Medtronic, Inc. Adjustment of therapy based on acceleration
CN103390329A (en) * 2012-05-07 2013-11-13 杨磊 Cervical spondylosis prophylactic equipment for computer user
WO2013173102A1 (en) 2012-05-18 2013-11-21 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Automatic pacing configuration switcher
US10602965B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2020-03-31 Medibotics Wearable deformable conductive sensors for human motion capture including trans-joint pitch, yaw, and roll
US9588582B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2017-03-07 Medibotics Llc Motion recognition clothing (TM) with two different sets of tubes spanning a body joint
US10321873B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2019-06-18 Medibotics Llc Smart clothing for ambulatory human motion capture
US9582072B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2017-02-28 Medibotics Llc Motion recognition clothing [TM] with flexible electromagnetic, light, or sonic energy pathways
US10716510B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2020-07-21 Medibotics Smart clothing with converging/diverging bend or stretch sensors for measuring body motion or configuration
US10719574B2 (en) 2012-07-12 2020-07-21 Vital Connect, Inc. Calibration of a chest-mounted wireless sensor device for posture and activity detection
US9035794B2 (en) * 2012-07-12 2015-05-19 Vital Connect, Inc. Posture calibration for activity monitoring
US9632981B2 (en) 2012-07-12 2017-04-25 Vital Connect, Inc. Calibration of a chest-mounted wireless sensor device for posture and activity detection
WO2014035922A2 (en) * 2012-08-27 2014-03-06 Cuevas Jose A Posture training device
US9259577B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2016-02-16 Greatbatch Ltd. Method and system of quick neurostimulation electrode configuration and positioning
US8868199B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2014-10-21 Greatbatch Ltd. System and method of compressing medical maps for pulse generator or database storage
US8903496B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2014-12-02 Greatbatch Ltd. Clinician programming system and method
US8983616B2 (en) 2012-09-05 2015-03-17 Greatbatch Ltd. Method and system for associating patient records with pulse generators
US9375582B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2016-06-28 Nuvectra Corporation Touch screen safety controls for clinician programmer
US9615788B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2017-04-11 Nuvectra Corporation Method and system of producing 2D representations of 3D pain and stimulation maps and implant models on a clinician programmer
US9180302B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2015-11-10 Greatbatch Ltd. Touch screen finger position indicator for a spinal cord stimulation programming device
US8761897B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2014-06-24 Greatbatch Ltd. Method and system of graphical representation of lead connector block and implantable pulse generators on a clinician programmer
US10668276B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2020-06-02 Cirtec Medical Corp. Method and system of bracketing stimulation parameters on clinician programmers
US9507912B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2016-11-29 Nuvectra Corporation Method and system of simulating a pulse generator on a clinician programmer
US9594877B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2017-03-14 Nuvectra Corporation Virtual reality representation of medical devices
US9471753B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2016-10-18 Nuvectra Corporation Programming and virtual reality representation of stimulation parameter Groups
US8812125B2 (en) 2012-08-31 2014-08-19 Greatbatch Ltd. Systems and methods for the identification and association of medical devices
US8757485B2 (en) 2012-09-05 2014-06-24 Greatbatch Ltd. System and method for using clinician programmer and clinician programming data for inventory and manufacturing prediction and control
US9767255B2 (en) 2012-09-05 2017-09-19 Nuvectra Corporation Predefined input for clinician programmer data entry
WO2014039925A2 (en) 2012-09-07 2014-03-13 Yale University Brian cooling system
WO2014059145A1 (en) * 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Forty Winks Llc Sleep tracking and waking optimization system and method therefor
US9446243B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2016-09-20 Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation Patient posture determination and stimulation program adjustment in an implantable stimulator device using impedance fingerprinting
US8670842B1 (en) 2012-12-14 2014-03-11 Pacesetter, Inc. Intra-cardiac implantable medical device
CN102973276B (en) * 2012-12-20 2014-05-07 毛毅翔 Device for preventing myopia and cervical spondylosis
CN108355242B (en) 2013-01-21 2022-04-15 卡拉健康公司 Apparatus and method for controlling tremor
US10220211B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2019-03-05 Livanova Usa, Inc. Methods and systems to diagnose depression
US9384671B2 (en) 2013-02-17 2016-07-05 Ronald Charles Krosky Instruction production
US20140276238A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Ivan Osorio Method, system and apparatus for fall detection
CA2909520A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-23 Dorsavi Pty Ltd Method and apparatus for monitoring dynamic status of a body
US9539422B2 (en) * 2013-07-02 2017-01-10 Greatbatch Ltd. Neurostimulator interconnection apparatus, system, and method
US10373714B1 (en) 2013-07-12 2019-08-06 Vital Connect, Inc. Determination of bed-time duration using wearable sensors
AU2014324081A1 (en) * 2013-09-19 2016-04-14 Dorsavi Pty Ltd Method and apparatus for monitoring quality of a dynamic activity of a body
US10512424B2 (en) 2013-12-23 2019-12-24 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for selecting activity response vector
KR20150081735A (en) * 2014-01-06 2015-07-15 삼성전자주식회사 Method and Apparatus for Measuring Body Fat in Mobile Device
US20150366488A1 (en) * 2014-01-20 2015-12-24 Michael Anderson Spinal motion sensor
US9814887B2 (en) 2014-02-06 2017-11-14 Medtronic, Inc. Selection of optimal accelerometer sensing axis for rate response in leadless pacemaker
US9452292B2 (en) 2014-02-24 2016-09-27 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting loss of capture
CN106413805A (en) 2014-06-02 2017-02-15 卡拉健康公司 Systems and methods for peripheral nerve stimulation to treat tremor
JP2017527429A (en) 2014-09-15 2017-09-21 ボストン サイエンティフィック ニューロモデュレイション コーポレイション Graphical user interface for programming neural stimulation pulse patterns
WO2016057553A1 (en) 2014-10-07 2016-04-14 Masimo Corporation Modular physiological sensors
JP2017531532A (en) 2014-10-21 2017-10-26 ローゼンブラッド,ケニース,ローレンス Posture improvement apparatus, system and method
US9566012B2 (en) 2014-10-27 2017-02-14 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for selection and use of virtual sensing vectors
EP3215217B1 (en) 2014-11-04 2021-09-15 Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation Method and apparatus for programming complex neurostimulation patterns
US9724518B2 (en) 2014-11-25 2017-08-08 Medtronic, Inc. Dynamic patient-specific filtering of an activity signal within a beating heart
JP6483419B2 (en) * 2014-12-01 2019-03-13 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Load judgment method
CN104622454A (en) * 2015-01-23 2015-05-20 深圳市卡麦睿科技有限公司 Multi-functional bracelet type human body intelligent monitor system
US9855005B2 (en) 2015-04-22 2018-01-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Wearable posture advisory system
CN112914514A (en) 2015-06-10 2021-06-08 卡拉健康公司 System and method for peripheral nerve stimulation to treat tremor with a detachable treatment and monitoring unit
WO2017019191A1 (en) 2015-07-30 2017-02-02 Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation User interface for custom patterned electrical stimulation
US9844676B2 (en) * 2015-08-27 2017-12-19 Medtronic, Inc. Systems, apparatus and methods facilitating communication between an implantable device and an external device
US10137305B2 (en) 2015-08-28 2018-11-27 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Systems and methods for behaviorally responsive signal detection and therapy delivery
US10220146B2 (en) 2015-09-18 2019-03-05 Medtronic, Inc. Adjustments to posture state definition
US10603482B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2020-03-31 Cala Health, Inc. Systems and methods for peripheral nerve stimulation in the finger or hand to treat hand tremors
CN108463266B (en) 2015-10-15 2021-10-08 波士顿科学神经调制公司 User interface for neurostimulation waveform construction
US9937352B2 (en) 2015-10-22 2018-04-10 Medtronic, Inc. Rate responsive cardiac pacing control using posture
US11099631B2 (en) 2015-11-13 2021-08-24 Andrew R. Basile, JR. Virtual reality system with posture control
CA3011993A1 (en) 2016-01-21 2017-08-03 Cala Health, Inc. Systems, methods and devices for peripheral neuromodulation for treating diseases related to overactive bladder
EP3432975B1 (en) 2016-03-21 2024-02-14 Nalu Medical, Inc. Devices for positioning external devices in relation to implanted devices
CN108882892A (en) * 2016-03-31 2018-11-23 Zoll医疗公司 The system and method for tracking patient motion
AU2017252643B2 (en) 2016-04-19 2022-04-14 Inspire Medical Systems, Inc. Accelerometer-based sensing for sleep disordered breathing (SDB) care
TWI595741B (en) * 2016-06-28 2017-08-11 建準電機工業股份有限公司 Motors, starting control method thereof and fans with the motors
AU2017293799B2 (en) 2016-07-08 2022-10-20 Cala Health, Inc. Systems and methods for stimulating n nerves with exactly n electrodes and improved dry electrodes
WO2018017463A1 (en) 2016-07-18 2018-01-25 Nalu Medical, Inc. Methods and systems for treating pelvic disorders and pain conditions
US9795322B1 (en) 2016-10-14 2017-10-24 Right Posture Pte. Ltd. Methods and systems for monitoring posture with alerts and analytics generated by a smart seat cover
CN107049324B (en) * 2016-11-23 2019-09-17 深圳大学 A kind of judgment method and device of limb motion posture
EP3585475B1 (en) 2017-02-24 2024-04-03 Nalu Medical, Inc. Apparatus with sequentially implanted stimulators
CN110545724B (en) * 2017-03-29 2022-12-06 皇家飞利浦有限公司 Sleeping position trainer with non-moving timer
CN108664850B (en) * 2017-03-30 2021-07-13 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Human face posture classification method and device
CN110809486A (en) 2017-04-03 2020-02-18 卡拉健康公司 Peripheral neuromodulation systems, methods, and devices for treating diseases associated with overactive bladder
CN107822629B (en) * 2017-09-11 2020-09-11 上海傲意信息科技有限公司 Method for detecting myoelectric axes on surfaces of limbs
US11153156B2 (en) * 2017-11-03 2021-10-19 Vignet Incorporated Achieving personalized outcomes with digital therapeutic applications
US11857778B2 (en) 2018-01-17 2024-01-02 Cala Health, Inc. Systems and methods for treating inflammatory bowel disease through peripheral nerve stimulation
TWI713053B (en) * 2018-04-10 2020-12-11 仁寶電腦工業股份有限公司 Motion evaluation system, method thereof and computer-readable recording medium
US20190365290A1 (en) * 2018-05-31 2019-12-05 Medtronic, Inc. Body and body part orientation and posture monitoring
GB2574074B (en) 2018-07-27 2020-05-20 Mclaren Applied Tech Ltd Time synchronisation
US11207016B2 (en) 2018-12-28 2021-12-28 Biosense Webster (Israel) Ltd. Mapping ECG signals using a multipole electrode assembly
CN109740545B (en) * 2019-01-08 2020-01-31 张典文 Electronic treatment auxiliary platform
CN111685770B (en) * 2019-03-12 2023-03-10 香港理工大学深圳研究院 Wearable human body back curve detection method and device
JP7377001B2 (en) * 2019-03-28 2023-11-09 北陸電気工業株式会社 Worker fall detection system and worker position detection system
CN113164747A (en) * 2019-04-25 2021-07-23 科利耳有限公司 Balancing activity classification of a prosthesis recipient
US20220047184A1 (en) * 2019-06-25 2022-02-17 Cochlear Limited Body noise-based health monitoring
JP2022542581A (en) 2019-07-25 2022-10-05 インスパイア・メディカル・システムズ・インコーポレイテッド Systems and methods for operating implantable medical devices based on sensed posture information
US11596342B2 (en) * 2019-09-19 2023-03-07 Medtronic, Inc. Automatic detection of body planes of rotation
US11890468B1 (en) 2019-10-03 2024-02-06 Cala Health, Inc. Neurostimulation systems with event pattern detection and classification
GB2588236B (en) 2019-10-18 2024-03-20 Mclaren Applied Ltd Gyroscope bias estimation
US11179567B2 (en) 2019-12-19 2021-11-23 Medtronic, Inc. Hysteresis compensation for detection of ECAPs
US11439825B2 (en) 2019-12-19 2022-09-13 Medtronic, Inc. Determining posture state from ECAPs
US11202912B2 (en) 2019-12-19 2021-12-21 Medtronic, Inc. Posture-based control of electrical stimulation therapy
US11452874B2 (en) 2020-02-03 2022-09-27 Medtronic, Inc. Shape control for electrical stimulation therapy
DE102020205091A1 (en) * 2020-04-22 2021-10-28 Siemens Healthcare Gmbh Method for generating a control signal
US11554264B2 (en) 2020-04-24 2023-01-17 Medtronic, Inc. Electrode position detection
US11857793B2 (en) 2020-06-10 2024-01-02 Medtronic, Inc. Managing storage of sensed information
EP3937428A1 (en) * 2020-07-06 2022-01-12 Roche Diagnostics GmbH Filtering data from an analytical device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5233984A (en) * 1991-03-29 1993-08-10 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable multi-axis position and activity sensor
US6466821B1 (en) * 1999-12-08 2002-10-15 Pacesetter, Inc. AC/DC multi-axis accelerometer for determining patient activity and body position
US20030088185A1 (en) * 2001-11-06 2003-05-08 Prass Richard L. Intraoperative neurophysiological monitoring system

Family Cites Families (316)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4297685A (en) 1979-05-31 1981-10-27 Environmental Devices Corporation Apparatus and method for sleep detection
US4365633A (en) 1980-02-22 1982-12-28 Telectronics Pty. Ltd. Patient-operated pacemaker programmer
US4543955A (en) 1983-08-01 1985-10-01 Cordis Corporation System for controlling body implantable action device
CA1213330A (en) 1983-10-14 1986-10-28 Canadian Patents And Development Limited - Societe Canadienne Des Brevets Et D'exploitation Limitee Movement artifact detector for sleep analysis
US4566456A (en) * 1984-10-18 1986-01-28 Cordis Corporation Apparatus and method for adjusting heart/pacer rate relative to right ventricular systolic pressure to obtain a required cardiac output
US5167229A (en) 1986-03-24 1992-12-01 Case Western Reserve University Functional neuromuscular stimulation system
FR2604908B1 (en) 1986-10-13 1990-06-22 Saint Nicolas Cie Financiere METHOD FOR ADJUSTING AN IMPLANTABLE HEART STIMULATOR ACCORDING TO THE EFFORT OF THE STIMULATOR CARRIER PATIENT, IMPLANTABLE HEART STIMULATOR AND EXTERNAL PROGRAMMER FOR CONTROLLING AN ADJUSTABLE IMPLANTABLE HEART STIMULATOR
US4771780A (en) 1987-01-15 1988-09-20 Siemens-Pacesetter, Inc. Rate-responsive pacemaker having digital motion sensor
DE3709073A1 (en) 1987-03-19 1988-09-29 Alt Eckhard IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE
US4776345A (en) 1987-09-04 1988-10-11 Cns, Inc. Interactive determination of sleep stages
US5040534A (en) 1989-01-25 1991-08-20 Siemens-Pacesetter, Inc. Microprocessor controlled rate-responsive pacemaker having automatic rate response threshold adjustment
US5278190A (en) 1989-11-30 1994-01-11 Clintec Nutrition Co. Method for improving the quality of sleep and treating sleep disorders
FR2657443B1 (en) 1990-01-24 1992-05-15 Blanchet Gerard ELECTRO-ENCEPHALOGRAPHIC SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS.
US5040536A (en) 1990-01-31 1991-08-20 Medtronic, Inc. Intravascular pressure posture detector
US5031618A (en) 1990-03-07 1991-07-16 Medtronic, Inc. Position-responsive neuro stimulator
US5125412A (en) 1990-07-23 1992-06-30 Thornton William E Musculoskeletal activity monitor
US5158078A (en) 1990-08-14 1992-10-27 Medtronic, Inc. Rate responsive pacemaker and methods for optimizing its operation
US5058584A (en) 1990-08-30 1991-10-22 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for epidural burst stimulation for angina pectoris
US5337758A (en) 1991-01-11 1994-08-16 Orthopedic Systems, Inc. Spine motion analyzer and method
DE4138702A1 (en) * 1991-03-22 1992-09-24 Madaus Medizin Elektronik METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE DIAGNOSIS AND QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS OF APNOE AND FOR THE SIMULTANEOUS DETERMINATION OF OTHER DISEASES
US5335657A (en) 1991-05-03 1994-08-09 Cyberonics, Inc. Therapeutic treatment of sleep disorder by nerve stimulation
DE69231157T2 (en) 1991-11-14 2001-02-15 Univ Technologies Int AUTOMATIC SYSTEM FOR GENERATING CONTINUOUS POSITIVE AIRWAY PRESSURE
US5431691A (en) * 1992-03-02 1995-07-11 Siemens Pacesetter, Inc. Method and system for recording and displaying a sequential series of pacing events
US5732696A (en) 1992-03-17 1998-03-31 New York University Polysomnograph scoring
US5354317A (en) 1992-04-03 1994-10-11 Intermedics, Inc. Apparatus and method for cardiac pacing responsive to patient position
US5469861A (en) 1992-04-17 1995-11-28 Mark F. Piscopo Posture monitor
US5312446A (en) 1992-08-26 1994-05-17 Medtronic, Inc. Compressed storage of data in cardiac pacemakers
US5425750A (en) 1993-07-14 1995-06-20 Pacesetter, Inc. Accelerometer-based multi-axis physical activity sensor for a rate-responsive pacemaker and method of fabrication
GB9321086D0 (en) 1993-10-13 1993-12-01 Univ Alberta Hand stimulator
FR2712501B1 (en) 1993-11-17 1996-02-09 Ela Medical Sa Medical device, in particular implantable defibrillator, with integrated Holter recording functions.
US5759149A (en) 1993-12-17 1998-06-02 Hill-Rom, Inc. Patient thermal support device
EP0672427A1 (en) 1994-03-17 1995-09-20 Siemens-Elema AB System for infusion of medicine into the body of a patient
US5514162A (en) 1994-06-07 1996-05-07 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for automatically determining the slope of a transfer function for a rate-responsive cardiac pacemaker
US5476483A (en) 1994-06-10 1995-12-19 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for modulating the base rate during sleep for a rate-responsive cardiac pacemaker
FI100851B (en) 1994-08-15 1998-03-13 Polar Electro Oy Method and apparatus for ambulatory recording and storage of a body part's movement in an individual and for simultaneous observation of movements of different body parts
FR2728798B1 (en) * 1994-12-30 1997-06-20 Ela Medical Sa METHOD FOR DETERMINING AN ACTIVITY CRITERION OF A MEASUREMENT SENSOR OF A SERVO PARAMETER IN AN ACTIVE IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE
US5674258A (en) 1995-03-08 1997-10-07 Medtronic, Inc. Packaged integrated accelerometer
US5911738A (en) 1997-07-31 1999-06-15 Medtronic, Inc. High output sensor and accelerometer implantable medical device
GB9505635D0 (en) 1995-03-21 1995-05-10 Walker David J Activity recording device
US5593431A (en) * 1995-03-30 1997-01-14 Medtronic, Inc. Medical service employing multiple DC accelerometers for patient activity and posture sensing and method
JP3664731B2 (en) 1995-03-30 2005-06-29 メドトロニック・インコーポレーテッド A heart rate pacemaker that distinguishes stairs climbing from other actions
US5725562A (en) 1995-03-30 1998-03-10 Medtronic Inc Rate responsive cardiac pacemaker and method for discriminating stair climbing from other activities
US5913727A (en) * 1995-06-02 1999-06-22 Ahdoot; Ned Interactive movement and contact simulation game
WO1997004705A1 (en) 1995-07-31 1997-02-13 Motorola Inc. Hybrid fes and active orthosis method and system for controlling the movement of a limb
US5643332A (en) 1995-09-20 1997-07-01 Neuromotion Inc. Assembly for functional electrical stimulation during movement
US5720770A (en) * 1995-10-06 1998-02-24 Pacesetter, Inc. Cardiac stimulation system with enhanced communication and control capability
US20020169485A1 (en) 1995-10-16 2002-11-14 Neuropace, Inc. Differential neurostimulation therapy driven by physiological context
US5741310A (en) * 1995-10-26 1998-04-21 Medtronic, Inc. System and method for hemodynamic pacing in ventricular tachycardia
US5919149A (en) 1996-03-19 1999-07-06 Allum; John H. Method and apparatus for angular position and velocity based determination of body sway for the diagnosis and rehabilitation of balance and gait disorders
US5628317A (en) 1996-04-04 1997-05-13 Medtronic, Inc. Ultrasonic techniques for neurostimulator control
US5716377A (en) 1996-04-25 1998-02-10 Medtronic, Inc. Method of treating movement disorders by brain stimulation
US5711316A (en) 1996-04-30 1998-01-27 Medtronic, Inc. Method of treating movement disorders by brain infusion
US6609031B1 (en) 1996-06-07 2003-08-19 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. Multiprogrammable tissue stimulator and method
US5938690A (en) 1996-06-07 1999-08-17 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. Pain management system and method
US6021352A (en) 1996-06-26 2000-02-01 Medtronic, Inc, Diagnostic testing methods and apparatus for implantable therapy devices
US6099479A (en) 1996-06-26 2000-08-08 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for operating therapy system
US5944680A (en) 1996-06-26 1999-08-31 Medtronic, Inc. Respiratory effort detection method and apparatus
US5895371A (en) * 1996-08-27 1999-04-20 Sabratek Corporation Medical treatment apparatus and method
US5782884A (en) 1996-11-05 1998-07-21 Sulzer Intermedics Inc. Rate responsive cardiac pacemaker with peak impedance detection for rate control
SE9604319D0 (en) * 1996-11-25 1996-11-25 Pacesetter Ab Medical detecting system
CA2219031A1 (en) 1996-11-27 1998-05-27 Kent P. Carswell Cover panel for electrical receptacles
DE19653773C1 (en) 1996-12-21 1998-07-02 Ggt Ges Fuer Gerontotechnik Mb Method and arrangement for recording fall situations of people at risk of health
US5836989A (en) 1996-12-26 1998-11-17 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling an implanted medical device in a time-dependent manner
US5893883A (en) * 1997-04-30 1999-04-13 Medtronic, Inc. Portable stimulation screening device for screening therapeutic effect of electrical stimulation on a patient user during normal activities of the patient user
US6249700B1 (en) 1997-06-12 2001-06-19 Eckhard Alt Defibrillator with improved hemodynamic response and enhanced myocardial stability
US6171276B1 (en) 1997-08-06 2001-01-09 Pharmacia & Upjohn Ab Automated delivery device and method for its operation
US6134459A (en) 1998-10-30 2000-10-17 Medtronic, Inc. Light focusing apparatus for medical electrical lead oxygen sensor
US5941906A (en) 1997-10-15 1999-08-24 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable, modular tissue stimulator
DE29719250U1 (en) 1997-10-30 1998-05-07 Hauptverband Der Gewerblichen Body stress measurement and analysis system
US6059576A (en) 1997-11-21 2000-05-09 Brann; Theodore L. Training and safety device, system and method to aid in proper movement during physical activity
NL1008619C2 (en) 1998-03-17 1999-10-01 Robert Christiaan Van Lummel Method for measuring and indicating the degree to which a person is limited in activities of daily life.
US5904708A (en) 1998-03-19 1999-05-18 Medtronic, Inc. System and method for deriving relative physiologic signals
US6120467A (en) 1998-04-30 2000-09-19 Medtronic Inc. Spinal cord simulation systems with patient activity monitoring and therapy adjustments
US6539249B1 (en) * 1998-05-11 2003-03-25 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Method and apparatus for assessing patient well-being
US6045513A (en) 1998-05-13 2000-04-04 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical device for tracking patient functional status
US6128534A (en) 1998-06-16 2000-10-03 Pacesetter, Inc. Implantable cardiac stimulation device and method for varying pacing parameters to mimic circadian cycles
FR2780654B1 (en) 1998-07-06 2000-12-01 Ela Medical Sa ACTIVE IMPLANTABLE MEDICAL DEVICE FOR ELECTROSTIMULATION TREATMENT OF SLEEP APNEA SYNDROME
US6027456A (en) 1998-07-10 2000-02-22 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for positioning spinal cord stimulation leads
DE19831109A1 (en) 1998-07-11 2000-01-13 Univ Schiller Jena Monitoring and evaluation of infants and new born breathing cycle
US6095991A (en) 1998-07-23 2000-08-01 Individual Monitoring Systems, Inc. Ambulatory body position monitor
US6157857A (en) 1998-07-24 2000-12-05 Dimpfel; Wilfried Apparatus for determining sleep staging
US7209787B2 (en) * 1998-08-05 2007-04-24 Bioneuronics Corporation Apparatus and method for closed-loop intracranial stimulation for optimal control of neurological disease
US7231254B2 (en) 1998-08-05 2007-06-12 Bioneuronics Corporation Closed-loop feedback-driven neuromodulation
US7403820B2 (en) 1998-08-05 2008-07-22 Neurovista Corporation Closed-loop feedback-driven neuromodulation
DE19842107A1 (en) 1998-09-08 2000-03-09 Biotronik Mess & Therapieg Method for recognizing a person's body position
SE9803197D0 (en) 1998-09-21 1998-09-21 Pacesetter Ab Medical implant
US6044297A (en) * 1998-09-25 2000-03-28 Medtronic, Inc. Posture and device orientation and calibration for implantable medical devices
US6308099B1 (en) 1998-11-13 2001-10-23 Intermedics Inc. Implantable device and programmer system which permits multiple programmers
US6259948B1 (en) * 1998-11-13 2001-07-10 Pacesetter, Inc. Medical device
US6393325B1 (en) * 1999-01-07 2002-05-21 Advanced Bionics Corporation Directional programming for implantable electrode arrays
US6216537B1 (en) * 1999-03-31 2001-04-17 Medtronic, Inc. Accelerometer for implantable medical device
US6083475A (en) * 1999-04-02 2000-07-04 Rentech, Inc. Method for making lithiated metal oxide
US6923784B2 (en) * 1999-04-30 2005-08-02 Medtronic, Inc. Therapeutic treatment of disorders based on timing information
US6635048B1 (en) 1999-04-30 2003-10-21 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical pump with multi-layer back-up memory
US6341236B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2002-01-22 Ivan Osorio Vagal nerve stimulation techniques for treatment of epileptic seizures
US6315740B1 (en) 1999-05-17 2001-11-13 Balbir Singh Seizure and movement monitoring apparatus
US6516749B1 (en) * 1999-06-18 2003-02-11 Salasoft, Inc. Apparatus for the delivery to an animal of a beneficial agent
US6351672B1 (en) 1999-07-22 2002-02-26 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for modulating the pacing rate based on patient activity and position
CA2314517A1 (en) 1999-07-26 2001-01-26 Gust H. Bardy System and method for determining a reference baseline of individual patient status for use in an automated collection and analysis patient care system
US6381496B1 (en) 1999-10-01 2002-04-30 Advanced Bionics Corporation Parameter context switching for an implanted device
US6449508B1 (en) 1999-10-21 2002-09-10 Medtronic, Inc. Accelerometer count calculation for activity signal for an implantable medical device
US6327501B1 (en) 1999-11-02 2001-12-04 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for determining safety alert conditions for implantable medical devices
US6368284B1 (en) 1999-11-16 2002-04-09 Cardiac Intelligence Corporation Automated collection and analysis patient care system and method for diagnosing and monitoring myocardial ischemia and outcomes thereof
KR100597005B1 (en) 1999-12-09 2006-07-06 삼성전자주식회사 Convergence measuring apparatus and method thereof
EP1246665B1 (en) 2000-01-07 2005-08-24 Biowave Corporation Electrotherapy apparatus
US6611783B2 (en) 2000-01-07 2003-08-26 Nocwatch, Inc. Attitude indicator and activity monitoring device
JP2001190526A (en) 2000-01-07 2001-07-17 Minolta Co Ltd Posture detecting device and respiratory function measuring device
US6974437B2 (en) 2000-01-21 2005-12-13 Medtronic Minimed, Inc. Microprocessor controlled ambulatory medical apparatus with hand held communication device
FR2804596B1 (en) 2000-02-04 2002-10-04 Agronomique Inst Nat Rech METHOD FOR THE ANALYSIS OF HUMAN LOCOMOTION IRREGULARITIES
US6477421B1 (en) 2000-02-24 2002-11-05 Pacesetter, Inc. Method and apparatus for position and motion sensing
US7806831B2 (en) 2000-03-02 2010-10-05 Itamar Medical Ltd. Method and apparatus for the non-invasive detection of particular sleep-state conditions by monitoring the peripheral vascular system
US7082333B1 (en) 2000-04-27 2006-07-25 Medtronic, Inc. Patient directed therapy management
US7066910B2 (en) 2000-04-27 2006-06-27 Medtronic, Inc. Patient directed therapy management
US6884596B2 (en) 2000-04-28 2005-04-26 The Regents Of The University Of California Screening and therapeutic methods for promoting wakefulness and sleep
US6572557B2 (en) 2000-05-09 2003-06-03 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for monitoring progression of cardiac disease state using physiologic sensors
DE10024103A1 (en) 2000-05-18 2001-11-29 Baumgart Schmitt Rudolf Arrangement for improving sleep quality by thermal stimulation has several thermoelectric units driven if sleep-related breathing problem automatically detected in real time
US6659968B1 (en) 2000-06-01 2003-12-09 Advanced Bionics Corporation Activity monitor for pain management efficacy measurement
US6748276B1 (en) 2000-06-05 2004-06-08 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. Neuromodulation therapy system
US20040049132A1 (en) 2000-06-15 2004-03-11 The Procter & Gamble Company Device for body activity detection and processing
US6605038B1 (en) 2000-06-16 2003-08-12 Bodymedia, Inc. System for monitoring health, wellness and fitness
US6687538B1 (en) * 2000-06-19 2004-02-03 Medtronic, Inc. Trial neuro stimulator with lead diagnostics
GB2368017B (en) * 2000-06-20 2004-05-12 Bournemouth University Higher Apparatus for electrical stimulation of the leg
US6468234B1 (en) 2000-07-14 2002-10-22 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University SleepSmart
US6459934B1 (en) 2000-07-21 2002-10-01 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Estimate of efficiency using acceleration-heart rate ratio
US7122066B2 (en) 2000-08-07 2006-10-17 Avertech, Inc. Air filter system
EP1195139A1 (en) 2000-10-05 2002-04-10 Ecole Polytechnique Féderale de Lausanne (EPFL) Body movement monitoring system and method
US8417334B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2013-04-09 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for electrically stimulating the nervous system to improve ventricular dysfunction, heart failure, and other cardiac conditions
US6820025B2 (en) 2000-10-30 2004-11-16 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Method and apparatus for motion tracking of an articulated rigid body
WO2002041771A1 (en) 2000-11-27 2002-05-30 Modco Inc. Apparatus and method for monitoring blood pressure and another physiological parameter
US6665558B2 (en) 2000-12-15 2003-12-16 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. System and method for correlation of patient health information and implant device data
US6438408B1 (en) 2000-12-28 2002-08-20 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical device for monitoring congestive heart failure
US20020091308A1 (en) 2001-01-09 2002-07-11 Kipshidze Nicholas N. Method and apparatus for the synchronized therapeutic treatment of a life form
DE10103973A1 (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-01 Peter L Kowallik Method and device for monitoring sleep
US6834436B2 (en) 2001-02-23 2004-12-28 Microstrain, Inc. Posture and body movement measuring system
US7167751B1 (en) 2001-03-01 2007-01-23 Advanced Bionics Corporation Method of using a fully implantable miniature neurostimulator for vagus nerve stimulation
US6620151B2 (en) 2001-03-01 2003-09-16 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. Non-constant pressure infusion pump
US6980857B2 (en) 2001-04-20 2005-12-27 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Patient controlled atrial shock therapy
EP1381425A1 (en) 2001-04-24 2004-01-21 Neurodan A/S Functional electrical therapy system (fets)
US6668188B2 (en) 2001-04-25 2003-12-23 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Determination of long-term condition of cardiac patients
US6641542B2 (en) 2001-04-30 2003-11-04 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus to detect and treat sleep respiratory events
WO2002101655A1 (en) 2001-05-16 2002-12-19 Sega Corporation Image processing method, image processing apparatus, and program for emphasizing object movement
CA2447643A1 (en) 2001-05-29 2002-12-05 Medtronic, Inc. Closed-loop neuromodulation for prevention and treatment of cardiac conditions
US6731984B2 (en) 2001-06-07 2004-05-04 Medtronic, Inc. Method for providing a therapy to a patient involving modifying the therapy after detecting an onset of sleep in the patient, and implantable medical device embodying same
CA2448806C (en) 2001-06-13 2011-10-18 Compumedics Limited Methods and apparatus for monitoring consciousness
US6658292B2 (en) 2001-08-24 2003-12-02 Pacesetter, Inc. Detection of patient's position and activity status using 3D accelerometer-based position sensor
US6625493B2 (en) 2001-08-24 2003-09-23 Pacesetter, Inc. Orientation of patient's position sensor using external field
US6937899B2 (en) 2001-08-30 2005-08-30 Medtronic, Inc. Ischemia detection
US6662047B2 (en) 2001-09-05 2003-12-09 Pacesetter, Inc. Pacing mode to reduce effects of orthostatic hypotension and syncope
US6961616B2 (en) 2001-09-27 2005-11-01 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Trending of conduction time for optimization of cardiac resynchronization therapy in cardiac rhythm management system
US7095424B2 (en) 2001-10-26 2006-08-22 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and method, and storage medium
US6751503B1 (en) 2001-11-01 2004-06-15 Pacesetter, Inc. Methods and systems for treating patients with congestive heart failure (CHF)
US6975904B1 (en) 2001-11-08 2005-12-13 Pacesetter, Inc. Modification of evoked response detection algorithm based on orientation and activity of patient
US6832113B2 (en) * 2001-11-16 2004-12-14 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Non-invasive method and apparatus for cardiac pacemaker pacing parameter optimization and monitoring of cardiac dysfunction
FR2833177B1 (en) 2001-12-07 2004-06-04 Ela Medical Sa ACTIVE MEDICAL DEVICE INCLUDING ADVANCED MEANS OF DISCRIMINATION IN THE WAKING AND SLEEPING PHASES
FR2833496B1 (en) 2001-12-14 2004-02-13 Ela Medical Sa ACTIVE MEDICAL DEVICE COMPRISING IMPROVED MEANS OF DIAGNOSING SLEEP APNEA SYNDROME
JP2005517654A (en) 2001-12-17 2005-06-16 メルク エンド カムパニー インコーポレーテッド Treatment of circadian rhythm disorders
US6997882B1 (en) 2001-12-21 2006-02-14 Barron Associates, Inc. 6-DOF subject-monitoring device and method
WO2003072186A2 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-09-04 The Cleveland Clinic Foundation Neurostimulation for affecting sleep disorders
US7110820B2 (en) 2002-02-05 2006-09-19 Tcheng Thomas K Responsive electrical stimulation for movement disorders
DE60327073D1 (en) 2002-02-07 2009-05-20 Ecole Polytech BODY MOVEMENT MONITOR
US7317948B1 (en) 2002-02-12 2008-01-08 Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. Neural stimulation system providing auto adjustment of stimulus output as a function of sensed impedance
US6928324B2 (en) 2002-02-14 2005-08-09 Pacesetter, Inc. Stimulation device for sleep apnea prevention, detection and treatment
US6999817B2 (en) 2002-02-14 2006-02-14 Packsetter, Inc. Cardiac stimulation device including sleep apnea prevention and treatment
US7043305B2 (en) * 2002-03-06 2006-05-09 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Method and apparatus for establishing context among events and optimizing implanted medical device performance
US7031772B2 (en) 2002-04-29 2006-04-18 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for rate responsive adjustments in an implantable medical device
US7123967B2 (en) 2002-05-13 2006-10-17 Pacesetter, Inc. Implantable neural stimulation device providing activity, rest, and long term closed-loop peripheral vascular disease therapy and method
US7151961B1 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-12-19 Advanced Bionics Corporation Treatment of movement disorders by brain stimulation
US6782315B2 (en) 2002-06-19 2004-08-24 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Method and apparatus for compensating misalignments of a sensor system used in a vehicle dynamic control system
US6922587B2 (en) * 2002-06-26 2005-07-26 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for tracking progression of left ventricular dysfunction using implantable cardiac stimulation device
US7117036B2 (en) 2002-06-27 2006-10-03 Pacesetter, Inc. Using activity-based rest disturbance as a metric of sleep apnea
US6817979B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2004-11-16 Nokia Corporation System and method for interacting with a user's virtual physiological model via a mobile terminal
WO2004036370A2 (en) 2002-10-15 2004-04-29 Medtronic Inc. Channel-selective blanking for a medical device system
US7218968B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2007-05-15 Medtronic, Inc. User interface for programming rate response technical field
US6878121B2 (en) 2002-11-01 2005-04-12 David T. Krausman Sleep scoring apparatus and method
US7016730B2 (en) * 2002-11-15 2006-03-21 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Method of operating implantable medical devices to prolong battery life
US7308311B2 (en) 2002-11-22 2007-12-11 Pacesetter, Inc. Physician programmer system with telemetered sensor waveform
US7189204B2 (en) * 2002-12-04 2007-03-13 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Sleep detection using an adjustable threshold
US7252640B2 (en) 2002-12-04 2007-08-07 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Detection of disordered breathing
US7149579B1 (en) 2002-12-23 2006-12-12 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for determining patient posture based on 3-D trajectory using an implantable medical device
US7149584B1 (en) * 2002-12-23 2006-12-12 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for determining patient posture based on 3-D trajectory using an implantable medical device
US7160252B2 (en) * 2003-01-10 2007-01-09 Medtronic, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting respiratory disturbances
US7207947B2 (en) 2003-01-10 2007-04-24 Pacesetter, Inc. System and method for detecting circadian states using an implantable medical device
US7155279B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2006-12-26 Advanced Bionics Corporation Treatment of movement disorders with drug therapy
US7489970B2 (en) * 2003-04-02 2009-02-10 Medtronic, Inc. Management of neurostimulation therapy using parameter sets
US7548786B2 (en) 2003-04-02 2009-06-16 Medtronic, Inc. Library for management of neurostimulation therapy programs
US7894908B2 (en) 2003-04-02 2011-02-22 Medtronic, Inc. Neurostimulation therapy optimization based on a rated session log
US7505815B2 (en) 2003-04-02 2009-03-17 Medtronic, Inc. Neurostimulation therapy usage diagnostics
US7266412B2 (en) 2003-04-22 2007-09-04 Medtronic, Inc. Generation of multiple neurostimulation therapy programs
US7221979B2 (en) 2003-04-30 2007-05-22 Medtronic, Inc. Methods and apparatus for the regulation of hormone release
US7162304B1 (en) * 2003-05-08 2007-01-09 Advanced Bionics Corporation System for measuring cardiac rhythm parameters for assessment of spinal cord stimulation
US7130681B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2006-10-31 Medtronic, Inc. Use of accelerometer signal to augment ventricular arrhythmia detection
US20040257693A1 (en) 2003-06-05 2004-12-23 Ehrlich Richard M. Disk drive disturbance rejection using accelerometer and/or back-EMF measurements
US20050004622A1 (en) 2003-07-03 2005-01-06 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems System and method for implantable pulse generator with multiple treatment protocols
US7092759B2 (en) 2003-07-30 2006-08-15 Medtronic, Inc. Method of optimizing cardiac resynchronization therapy using sensor signals of septal wall motion
US8060173B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2011-11-15 Dexcom, Inc. System and methods for processing analyte sensor data
US7591265B2 (en) * 2003-09-18 2009-09-22 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Coordinated use of respiratory and cardiac therapies for sleep disordered breathing
EP1670547B1 (en) 2003-08-18 2008-11-12 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Patient monitoring system
US7887493B2 (en) 2003-09-18 2011-02-15 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Implantable device employing movement sensing for detecting sleep-related disorders
US7664546B2 (en) * 2003-09-18 2010-02-16 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Posture detection system and method
US8002553B2 (en) 2003-08-18 2011-08-23 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Sleep quality data collection and evaluation
DE602004014281D1 (en) 2003-08-18 2008-07-17 Cardiac Pacemakers Inc CONTROL UNIT FOR IRREGULAR BREATHING
US7572225B2 (en) 2003-09-18 2009-08-11 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Sleep logbook
US8396565B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2013-03-12 Medtronic, Inc. Automatic therapy adjustments
WO2005032658A1 (en) 2003-10-02 2005-04-14 Medtronic, Inc. User interface for external charger for implantable medical device
US7181281B1 (en) * 2003-10-08 2007-02-20 Pacesetter, Inc. ICD using MEMS for optimal therapy
JP3960298B2 (en) 2003-11-19 2007-08-15 株式会社デンソー Sleeping and posture detection device
US7142921B2 (en) 2003-12-11 2006-11-28 Medtronic, Inc. Single axis accelerometer and method therefore
US7471980B2 (en) 2003-12-22 2008-12-30 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Synchronizing continuous signals and discrete events for an implantable medical device
US6964641B2 (en) 2003-12-24 2005-11-15 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical device with sleep disordered breathing monitoring
US20050172311A1 (en) 2004-01-31 2005-08-04 Nokia Corporation Terminal and associated method and computer program product for monitoring at least one activity of a user
WO2005079487A2 (en) 2004-02-17 2005-09-01 Diagnostic Ultrasound Corporation System and method for measuring bladder wall thickness and mass
US7130689B1 (en) 2004-02-24 2006-10-31 Pacesetter, Inc. Methods and systems for optimizing cardiac pacing intervals for various physiologic factors
US7366572B2 (en) * 2004-03-16 2008-04-29 Medtronic, Inc. Controlling therapy based on sleep quality
US8725244B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2014-05-13 Medtronic, Inc. Determination of sleep quality for neurological disorders
US7330760B2 (en) * 2004-03-16 2008-02-12 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting posture information to evaluate therapy
US7491181B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2009-02-17 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting activity and sleep quality information via a medical device
US7881798B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2011-02-01 Medtronic Inc. Controlling therapy based on sleep quality
US7717848B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2010-05-18 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting sleep quality information via a medical device
US20070276439A1 (en) 2004-03-16 2007-11-29 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting sleep quality information via a medical device
US7805196B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2010-09-28 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting activity information to evaluate therapy
US7792583B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2010-09-07 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting posture information to evaluate therapy
US7542803B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2009-06-02 Medtronic, Inc. Sensitivity analysis for selecting therapy parameter sets
US7395113B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2008-07-01 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting activity information to evaluate therapy
US20050209512A1 (en) 2004-03-16 2005-09-22 Heruth Kenneth T Detecting sleep
US8055348B2 (en) * 2004-03-16 2011-11-08 Medtronic, Inc. Detecting sleep to evaluate therapy
US8308661B2 (en) 2004-03-16 2012-11-13 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting activity and sleep quality information via a medical device
US20050222638A1 (en) 2004-03-30 2005-10-06 Steve Foley Sensor based gastrointestinal electrical stimulation for the treatment of obesity or motility disorders
US8135473B2 (en) 2004-04-14 2012-03-13 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting posture and activity information to evaluate therapy
WO2005102449A1 (en) 2004-04-14 2005-11-03 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting posture and activity information to evaluate therapy
NZ533460A (en) 2004-06-10 2006-10-27 Movement Metrics Ltd Biomechanical monitoring apparatus with motion detectors and accumulation means to indicate time period where threshold activity is exceeded
US7840268B2 (en) 2004-06-21 2010-11-23 Advanced Neuromodulation Systems, Inc. System and method of managing medical device historical data
US7819909B2 (en) 2004-07-20 2010-10-26 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy programming guidance based on stored programming history
US7559901B2 (en) 2004-07-28 2009-07-14 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Determining a patient's posture from mechanical vibrations of the heart
US7387610B2 (en) 2004-08-19 2008-06-17 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Thoracic impedance detection with blood resistivity compensation
US7805185B2 (en) 2005-05-09 2010-09-28 Cardiac Pacemakers, In. Posture monitoring using cardiac activation sequences
ITTO20040847A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2005-03-01 St Microelectronics Srl DISPLACEMENT DEVICE FOR A PORTABLE DEVICE
EP1831502B1 (en) 2004-12-14 2018-10-31 Raytheon Company Centralizer-based survey and navigation device and method
US20060206167A1 (en) 2005-01-06 2006-09-14 Flaherty J C Multi-device patient ambulation system
US20060262120A1 (en) 2005-05-19 2006-11-23 Outland Research, Llc Ambulatory based human-computer interface
US8744585B2 (en) 2005-02-23 2014-06-03 Medtronics, Inc. Implantable medical device providing adaptive neurostimulation therapy for incontinence
US20060195051A1 (en) 2005-02-25 2006-08-31 Schnapp Elma O Posture monitoring device and method of use thereof
US7577479B2 (en) 2005-03-17 2009-08-18 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Methods and devices for implementing time of day pacing adjustments
US7519431B2 (en) * 2005-04-11 2009-04-14 Medtronic, Inc. Shifting between electrode combinations in electrical stimulation device
US20060235289A1 (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-19 Willem Wesselink Pacemaker lead with motion sensor
US7603170B2 (en) 2005-04-26 2009-10-13 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Calibration of impedance monitoring of respiratory volumes using thoracic D.C. impedance
US7406351B2 (en) 2005-04-28 2008-07-29 Medtronic, Inc. Activity sensing for stimulator control
US7610093B2 (en) 2005-04-28 2009-10-27 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable optical pressure sensor for sensing urinary sphincter pressure
US7389147B2 (en) 2005-04-29 2008-06-17 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy delivery mode selection
EP1883450B1 (en) 2005-04-29 2009-12-09 Medtronic, Inc. Distributed lead functionality testing
WO2006119046A1 (en) 2005-04-30 2006-11-09 Medtronic, Inc. Impedance-based stimulation adjustment
US20080194998A1 (en) 2005-05-24 2008-08-14 Nils Holmstrom Method, Device and Computer-Readable Medium for Evaluating Prevalence of Different Patient Postures
US8021299B2 (en) * 2005-06-01 2011-09-20 Medtronic, Inc. Correlating a non-polysomnographic physiological parameter set with sleep states
US7430447B2 (en) 2005-06-06 2008-09-30 Pacesetter, Inc. Evoked response and impedance measures for monitoring heart failure and respiration
JP5028751B2 (en) * 2005-06-09 2012-09-19 ソニー株式会社 Action recognition device
JP4813103B2 (en) 2005-06-17 2011-11-09 東京応化工業株式会社 COMPOUND, POSITIVE RESIST COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR FORMING RESIST PATTERN
WO2007009088A2 (en) 2005-07-12 2007-01-18 Alfred E. Mann Institute For Biomedical Engineering At The University Of Southern California Method and apparatus for detecting object orientation and position
US8033996B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2011-10-11 Adidas Ag Computer interfaces including physiologically guided avatars
US20070032748A1 (en) * 2005-07-28 2007-02-08 608442 Bc Ltd. System for detecting and analyzing body motion
US7590481B2 (en) 2005-09-19 2009-09-15 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Integrated vehicle control system using dynamically determined vehicle conditions
US9061146B2 (en) 2005-10-28 2015-06-23 Medtronic, Inc. Impedance-based bladder sensing
US8366641B2 (en) 2005-11-18 2013-02-05 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Posture detector calibration and use
US7471290B2 (en) 2005-11-18 2008-12-30 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Posture detection system
US20070129641A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Sweeney Robert J Posture estimation at transitions between states
US7766840B2 (en) 2005-12-01 2010-08-03 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Method and system for heart failure status evaluation based on a disordered breathing index
US8016776B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2011-09-13 Medtronic, Inc. Wearable ambulatory data recorder
WO2007064924A1 (en) 2005-12-02 2007-06-07 Medtronic, Inc. Closed-loop therapy adjustment
US7853322B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2010-12-14 Medtronic, Inc. Closed-loop therapy adjustment
US7957809B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2011-06-07 Medtronic, Inc. Closed-loop therapy adjustment
IL173604A (en) 2006-02-08 2013-01-31 E Afikim Milking Systems Agricultural Cooperative Ltd Sa Device and method for measuring an animal's posture, particularly for measuring a ruminant's posture
US7747330B2 (en) 2006-03-09 2010-06-29 Medtronic, Inc. Global parameter adjustment for multiple stimulation programs
WO2007112092A2 (en) 2006-03-24 2007-10-04 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting gait information for evaluation and control of therapy
US20070255154A1 (en) 2006-04-28 2007-11-01 Medtronic, Inc. Activity level feedback for managing obesity
US7715920B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2010-05-11 Medtronic, Inc. Tree-based electrical stimulator programming
US8200341B2 (en) * 2007-02-07 2012-06-12 Cameron Health, Inc. Sensing vector selection in a cardiac stimulus device with postural assessment
US20070293917A1 (en) 2006-06-15 2007-12-20 Thompson Thomas C Non-invasive neuro stimulation system
EP1870128A1 (en) 2006-06-19 2007-12-26 Lifestim S.r.l. Analgesic neuromodulating device, with a modulating effect depending on the user's activity and position
US8060203B2 (en) 2006-08-28 2011-11-15 St. Jude Medical Ab Method and apparatus for determining variation over time of a medical parameter of a human being
US8438693B2 (en) * 2006-09-11 2013-05-14 Panasonic Corporation Electric cleaner
WO2008039242A1 (en) 2006-09-28 2008-04-03 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical device with sensor self-test feature
DE602007006528D1 (en) 2006-09-28 2010-06-24 Medtronic Inc CAPACITIVE INTERFACE CIRCUIT FOR A LOW-POWER SENSOR SYSTEM
US8155731B1 (en) * 2006-10-18 2012-04-10 Pacesetter, Inc. Systems and methods for detecting and compensating for changes in posture during ischemia detection using an implantable medical device
US7764996B2 (en) 2006-10-31 2010-07-27 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Monitoring of chronobiological rhythms for disease and drug management using one or more implantable device
US7616993B2 (en) * 2006-11-27 2009-11-10 Biotronik Crm Patent Ag Heart stimulator using a Bezier function to define AV-delay values
US8556833B2 (en) 2007-01-10 2013-10-15 Integrity Tracking, Llc Wireless sensor network system and method
CA2677122C (en) 2007-02-01 2014-12-09 Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation Neurostimulation system for measuring patient activity
US20090046056A1 (en) 2007-03-14 2009-02-19 Raydon Corporation Human motion tracking device
GB2447647A (en) 2007-03-16 2008-09-24 Cambridge Neurotechnology Ltd Activity monitor
US9943234B2 (en) * 2007-04-17 2018-04-17 Cardiac Pacemakers, Inc. Using respiration distress manifestations for heart failure detection
WO2008130291A1 (en) * 2007-04-24 2008-10-30 St. Jude Medical Ab Implantable medical system for detecting incipient edema
US7769464B2 (en) 2007-04-30 2010-08-03 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy adjustment
US7822481B2 (en) 2007-04-30 2010-10-26 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy adjustment
US8103351B2 (en) 2007-05-07 2012-01-24 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy control using relative motion between sensors
US8788055B2 (en) 2007-05-07 2014-07-22 Medtronic, Inc. Multi-location posture sensing
WO2008143738A1 (en) 2007-05-18 2008-11-27 Ultimate Balance, Inc. Newtonian physical activity monitor
US8805508B2 (en) 2007-05-30 2014-08-12 Medtronic, Inc. Collecting activity data for evaluation of patient incontinence
US8204597B2 (en) 2007-05-30 2012-06-19 Medtronic, Inc. Evaluating patient incontinence
US20090048528A1 (en) * 2007-08-16 2009-02-19 Bruce Hopenfeld System and methods for detecting ischemia with a limited extracardiac lead set
US8221290B2 (en) 2007-08-17 2012-07-17 Adidas International Marketing B.V. Sports electronic training system with electronic gaming features, and applications thereof
US20090076343A1 (en) 2007-09-14 2009-03-19 Corventis, Inc. Energy Management for Adherent Patient Monitor
US8380314B2 (en) 2007-09-26 2013-02-19 Medtronic, Inc. Patient directed therapy control
WO2009042170A1 (en) 2007-09-26 2009-04-02 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy program selection
US20090264789A1 (en) 2007-09-26 2009-10-22 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy program selection
EP2211986B1 (en) 2007-10-16 2013-11-20 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy control based on a patient movement state
US9723987B2 (en) * 2007-10-24 2017-08-08 Medtronic, Inc. Remote calibration of an implantable patient sensor
US9772689B2 (en) 2008-03-04 2017-09-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Enhanced gesture-based image manipulation
US8287520B2 (en) 2008-04-10 2012-10-16 Medtronic, Inc. Automated integrity tests
US9050471B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2015-06-09 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state display on medical device user interface
US8209028B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2012-06-26 Medtronic, Inc. Objectification of posture state-responsive therapy based on patient therapy adjustments
US8583252B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2013-11-12 Medtronic, Inc. Patient interaction with posture-responsive therapy
US9776008B2 (en) * 2008-07-11 2017-10-03 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state responsive therapy delivery using dwell times
US9440084B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2016-09-13 Medtronic, Inc. Programming posture responsive therapy
US8708934B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2014-04-29 Medtronic, Inc. Reorientation of patient posture states for posture-responsive therapy
US8437861B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2013-05-07 Medtronic, Inc. Posture state redefinition based on posture data and therapy adjustments
US8326420B2 (en) 2008-07-11 2012-12-04 Medtronic, Inc. Associating therapy adjustments with posture states using stability timers
US8529448B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2013-09-10 Cerner Innovation, Inc. Computerized systems and methods for stability—theoretic prediction and prevention of falls
JP5819957B2 (en) * 2010-07-01 2015-11-24 カーディアック ペースメイカーズ, インコーポレイテッド Treatment circuit protection in implantable medical devices

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5233984A (en) * 1991-03-29 1993-08-10 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable multi-axis position and activity sensor
US6466821B1 (en) * 1999-12-08 2002-10-15 Pacesetter, Inc. AC/DC multi-axis accelerometer for determining patient activity and body position
US20030088185A1 (en) * 2001-11-06 2003-05-08 Prass Richard L. Intraoperative neurophysiological monitoring system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2307092A2 (en) 2011-04-13
US9327129B2 (en) 2016-05-03
WO2010005800A3 (en) 2010-05-27
WO2010005828A3 (en) 2010-05-27
US20100010390A1 (en) 2010-01-14
WO2010005822A3 (en) 2010-05-20
US20100010384A1 (en) 2010-01-14
CN102089032B (en) 2015-06-17
WO2010005802A3 (en) 2010-05-27
US20180071536A1 (en) 2018-03-15
EP2656787A1 (en) 2013-10-30
WO2010005802A2 (en) 2010-01-14
EP2303122A2 (en) 2011-04-06
US20230264029A1 (en) 2023-08-24
US20100010381A1 (en) 2010-01-14
US20100010583A1 (en) 2010-01-14
EP2313004A2 (en) 2011-04-27
CN102089032A (en) 2011-06-08
WO2010005822A2 (en) 2010-01-14
US11672989B2 (en) 2023-06-13
US8958885B2 (en) 2015-02-17
US20200139131A9 (en) 2020-05-07
US20100010382A1 (en) 2010-01-14
US8688225B2 (en) 2014-04-01
CN102137623B (en) 2014-08-06
EP2313005A2 (en) 2011-04-27
EP2307092B1 (en) 2014-11-26
CN102137623A (en) 2011-07-27
WO2010005816A3 (en) 2010-05-27
WO2010005809A3 (en) 2010-05-27
US20100010380A1 (en) 2010-01-14
WO2010005800A2 (en) 2010-01-14
US8219206B2 (en) 2012-07-10
EP2656787B1 (en) 2018-01-31
WO2010005816A2 (en) 2010-01-14
WO2010005809A2 (en) 2010-01-14
US9545518B2 (en) 2017-01-17
US20240115864A1 (en) 2024-04-11
US9776008B2 (en) 2017-10-03
EP2313004B1 (en) 2014-06-11
EP2303122B1 (en) 2014-10-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11004556B2 (en) Associating therapy adjustments with posture states using a stability timer
US8219206B2 (en) Dwell time adjustments for posture state-responsive therapy
US9919159B2 (en) Programming posture responsive therapy
US8200340B2 (en) Guided programming for posture-state responsive therapy
US9744365B2 (en) Presentation of information associated with medical device therapy
US8588929B2 (en) Posture state redefinition based on posture data and therapy adjustments
EP2339965B1 (en) Obtaining baseline patient information
WO2010126539A1 (en) Medical device therapy based on posture and timing
WO2011085236A1 (en) Display of detected patient posture state

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09789994

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09789994

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2